WO2023202220A1 - Communication method and apparatus - Google Patents

Communication method and apparatus Download PDF

Info

Publication number
WO2023202220A1
WO2023202220A1 PCT/CN2023/078461 CN2023078461W WO2023202220A1 WO 2023202220 A1 WO2023202220 A1 WO 2023202220A1 CN 2023078461 W CN2023078461 W CN 2023078461W WO 2023202220 A1 WO2023202220 A1 WO 2023202220A1
Authority
WO
WIPO (PCT)
Prior art keywords
cell
terminal device
information
wireless access
node
Prior art date
Application number
PCT/CN2023/078461
Other languages
French (fr)
Chinese (zh)
Inventor
黄正磊
潘奇
倪慧
Original Assignee
华为技术有限公司
Priority date (The priority date is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the date listed.)
Filing date
Publication date
Application filed by 华为技术有限公司 filed Critical 华为技术有限公司
Publication of WO2023202220A1 publication Critical patent/WO2023202220A1/en

Links

Classifications

    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04WWIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORKS
    • H04W36/00Hand-off or reselection arrangements
    • H04W36/0005Control or signalling for completing the hand-off
    • H04W36/0083Determination of parameters used for hand-off, e.g. generation or modification of neighbour cell lists
    • H04W36/0085Hand-off measurements
    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04WWIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORKS
    • H04W36/00Hand-off or reselection arrangements
    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04WWIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORKS
    • H04W36/00Hand-off or reselection arrangements
    • H04W36/08Reselecting an access point
    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04WWIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORKS
    • H04W36/00Hand-off or reselection arrangements
    • H04W36/24Reselection being triggered by specific parameters
    • H04W36/30Reselection being triggered by specific parameters by measured or perceived connection quality data
    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04WWIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORKS
    • H04W36/00Hand-off or reselection arrangements
    • H04W36/34Reselection control
    • H04W36/38Reselection control by fixed network equipment

Definitions

  • the present application relates to the field of communication technology, and in particular, to a communication method and device.
  • the fifth generation mobile communication system (5th-generation, 5G) introduces integrated access and backhaul (IAB) network technology.
  • the access link and backhaul link in the IAB network (backhaul link) all adopt wireless transmission solutions, which can improve signal coverage and reduce deployment costs.
  • the IAB host node is connected to the core network through a wired link.
  • an IAB node is added between the IAB host node and the user equipment (UE), so that the UE can Connect to the IAB host node through the IAB node, and then access the core network.
  • UE user equipment
  • the IAB host node controls the cell switching of the UE based on the measurement information reported by the UE. If the measurement information indicates that the signal strength of other cells is higher than the signal strength of the cell currently accessed by the UE, the IAB host node may instruct the UE to perform cell switching. In some scenarios, the UE and the IAB node it accesses can move synchronously. For example, if an ambulance acts as an IAB node and the medical equipment on the ambulance acts as a UE, then the UE and the IAB node can move synchronously.
  • the IAB host node will instruct the UE to perform cell switching. However, as the UE and the IAB node continue to move synchronously, the signal strength of the IAB node may be higher than the signal strength of other IAB nodes, and the IAB host node may again instruct the UE to switch back to the IAB node. It can be seen that during the process of synchronous movement of the UE and the IAB node, the UE may perform multiple cell switches. These multiple cell switches will cause a large delay and are not conducive to the stability of the UE communication.
  • Embodiments of the present application provide a communication method and device for reducing the cell switching process of terminal equipment, thereby reducing the delay caused by multiple cell switching and improving the stability of terminal equipment communication.
  • this application provides a communication method, which can be executed by a host wireless access node, or by other devices including the host wireless access node function, or by a chip system or other functional modules, and the chip system or The functional module can realize the function of the host wireless access node, and the chip system or the functional module is, for example, provided in the host wireless access node.
  • the host wireless access node is, for example, an IAB host node.
  • the method includes: a host wireless access node determines first information, where the first information is information related to a terminal device accessing a cell, wherein the cell currently accessed by the terminal device is a cell corresponding to the relay wireless access node. In the first cell, the relay wireless access node is a child node of the host wireless access node; the host wireless access node controls cell switching of the terminal device according to the first information.
  • the host wireless access node needs to control the cell switching of the terminal device based on the first information, which is equivalent to adding a judgment condition when the host wireless access node determines whether the terminal device performs cell switching, which can reduce the number of terminal devices. number of switching times. For example, during the synchronous movement of the relay wireless access node and the terminal device, the host wireless access node can no longer frequently trigger the terminal device to perform cell switching based on the signal strength of the cell, even if there are other cells with higher signal strength than the relay.
  • the signal strength of the cell corresponding to the wireless access node the host wireless access node also needs to consider the first information to determine whether to switch, thereby reducing the number of switching times of the terminal device, reducing the delay caused by multiple switching, and improving the communication efficiency of the terminal device. stability.
  • the first information is information related to the terminal device accessing the cell. The host wireless node controls the cell switching of the terminal device according to the first information, which can make the control result more accurate, so that the terminal device can perform cell switching at an appropriate time.
  • the first information includes cell switching rules
  • the cell switching rules may include one or more of the following rules:
  • the signal strength of the first cell is greater than or equal to the first threshold, and the terminal device does not perform cell switching;
  • the signal strength of the first cell is less than or equal to the second threshold, and the terminal device performs cell switching;
  • the first cell has an associated relationship with the terminal device, and the terminal device does not perform cell switching.
  • the host wireless access node can control the cell switching of the terminal device according to the cell switching rules, and the cell switching rules include multiple rules, and the implementation method is flexible.
  • the host wireless access node controls the cell switching of the terminal device according to the first information, which may be: the host wireless access node receives measurements from the terminal device. Information, the measurement information includes the signal strength of the first cell; the host wireless access node controls the cell switching of the terminal device according to the cell switching rule and the signal strength of the first cell. For example, if the signal strength of the first cell is greater than or equal to the first threshold, the host wireless access node can determine that the terminal device does not perform cell handover according to the cell switching rule, that is, the signal strength of the cell currently accessed by the terminal device is greater than or equal to The first threshold can meet the communication requirements of the terminal device.
  • the first information may be: the host wireless access node receives measurements from the terminal device. Information, the measurement information includes the signal strength of the first cell; the host wireless access node controls the cell switching of the terminal device according to the cell switching rule and the signal strength of the first cell. For example, if the signal strength of the first cell is greater than or equal to the first threshold, the host wireless access
  • the host wireless access node Even if the signal strength of other cells is higher than the signal strength of the cell currently accessed by the terminal device, the host wireless access node will not trigger the terminal device to perform cell switching. In this way, During the synchronous movement of the terminal device and the relay wireless access node, if the signal strength of the cell corresponding to the relay wireless access node is greater than or equal to the first threshold, the host wireless access node can keep the terminal device connected to the relay wireless access node. The access relationship between the cells corresponding to the ingress node prevents the terminal equipment from performing cell switching, thereby reducing unnecessary cell switching by the terminal equipment.
  • the host wireless access node may determine that the terminal device performs cell handover according to the cell switching rule, that is, the signal strength of the cell currently accessed by the terminal device is less than or equal to
  • the second threshold cannot meet the communication requirements of the terminal device, and there are other cells whose signal strength is higher than the signal strength of the cell currently accessed by the terminal device.
  • the host wireless access node can trigger the terminal device to perform cell switching to meet the second threshold. Communication requirements for terminal equipment.
  • the host wireless access node controls the cell switching of the terminal device according to the first information, which may be: the host wireless access node determines whether the terminal device is the same as the terminal device. The first cell has an association relationship; the host wireless access node determines that the terminal device does not perform cell switching based on the cell switching rule and the association relationship.
  • the host wireless access node can first determine whether there is an association relationship between the terminal device and the cell it is currently accessing, and then control the cell switching of the terminal device according to the cell switching rules. For example, the host wireless access node determines that the terminal device has an association relationship with the cell it is currently accessing. The host wireless access node determines that the terminal device does not perform cell switching based on the cell switching rules and the association relationship, thereby reducing unnecessary cell switching for the terminal device. switch.
  • the method may further include: the host wireless access node sending the first information to the terminal device. In this way, the host wireless access node can send the first information to the terminal device.
  • the first information includes cell reselection rules
  • the cell reselection rules include one or more of the following rules:
  • the signal strength of the first cell is greater than or equal to the third threshold, and the terminal device does not perform cell reselection;
  • the signal strength of the first cell is less than or equal to the fourth threshold, and the terminal device performs cell reselection
  • the first cell has an associated relationship with the terminal device, and the terminal device does not perform cell reselection.
  • the host wireless access node can also determine the cell reselection rule and send the cell reselection rule to the terminal device.
  • the terminal device can control the cell reselection according to the cell reselection rule, and the cell reselection rule Contains a variety of rules and flexible implementation methods.
  • the method may further include: the host wireless access node sending first indication information, wherein the first indication information indicates that the cell type of the first cell is a relay cell. .
  • the host wireless access node can broadcast the first indication information to indicate that the cell type of the first cell is a relay cell.
  • the terminal device can determine whether to perform cell reselection according to the cell reselection rules, instead of just Determine whether to perform cell reselection based on the signal strength of the cell.
  • the method may further include: the host wireless access node determining a first identity of the first cell, wherein the first identity is used for the terminal device to access the The first cell; the host wireless access node sends the first identifier to the terminal device.
  • the host wireless access node can determine the first identity of the first cell and send the first identity to the terminal device, so that the terminal device accesses the first cell according to the first identity.
  • the first identification is, for example, readable identification information, such as identification information identifiable by the user.
  • the terminal device can display the first identification so that the user can determine whether to access the first cell based on the first identification, thereby enabling the terminal device to Access a suitable cell, such as the cell corresponding to the user's current location.
  • the host wireless access node determines the first identity of the first cell, which may be: the host wireless access node receives a message from the access and mobility management function network element. the first identifier.
  • the first identification may come from the access and mobility management function network element.
  • the first identifier may be a preconfigured identifier of the access and mobility management function network element, or an identifier obtained by the access and mobility management function network element from the unified data management function network element or the application function network element.
  • the host wireless access node determines the first information, which may be: the host wireless access node receives a third message from the access and mobility management function network element or the terminal device. Two indication information, wherein the second indication information indicates that the terminal device has an association relationship with the first cell; the host wireless access node determines the first information according to the second indication information. In this way, the host wireless access node can determine that the terminal device has an association relationship with the first cell based on the second indication information from the access and mobility management function network element or the terminal device, and determine the first information based on the association relationship. . For example, the host wireless access node can configure cell switching rules based on the association relationship.
  • the terminal device does not perform cell switching to reduce the synchronization between the terminal device and the relay wireless access node.
  • the host wireless access node can also configure cell reselection rules based on the association relationship. If the terminal device has an association relationship with the first cell, the terminal device does not perform cell reselection.
  • this application provides a communication method, which can be executed by a terminal device, or by other devices including terminal device functions, or by a chip system or other functional modules that can implement the terminal device function, the chip system or functional module is, for example, provided in a terminal device.
  • This method includes: terminal device Be prepared to receive first information from the host wireless access node, where the first information is information related to the terminal device accessing a cell, wherein the cell currently accessed by the terminal device is the third cell corresponding to the relay wireless access node.
  • a cell, the relay wireless access node is a child node of the host wireless access node; the terminal device controls cell reselection of the terminal device according to the first information.
  • the terminal device needs to control cell reselection based on the first information, which is equivalent to adding a judgment condition when the terminal device determines the cell to access, which can reduce the number of handovers of the terminal device. For example, during the synchronous movement of the relay wireless access node and the terminal device, the terminal device can no longer determine the cell to be accessed based only on the signal strength of the cell, even if there are other cells with higher signal strength than the relay wireless access node. The terminal device also needs to consider the first information before determining the cell to access based on the signal strength of the cell corresponding to the ingress node, thereby reducing the frequent synchronous movement of the terminal device and the relay wireless access node after the terminal device accesses other cells.
  • the first information is information related to the terminal device accessing the cell.
  • the terminal device controls cell reselection based on the first information, which can make the control result more accurate and the terminal device can select a suitable cell for access.
  • the first information includes cell reselection rules
  • the cell reselection rules include one or more of the following rules:
  • the signal strength of the first cell is greater than or equal to the third threshold, and the terminal device does not perform cell reselection;
  • the signal strength of the first cell is less than or equal to the fourth threshold, and the terminal device performs cell reselection
  • the first cell has an associated relationship with the terminal device, and the terminal device does not perform cell reselection.
  • the terminal device controls cell reselection of the terminal device according to the first information, which may be: the terminal device determines measurement information, and the measurement information includes the first The signal strength of the cell; the terminal device controls the cell reselection of the terminal device according to the cell reselection rule and the signal strength of the first cell.
  • the first information may be: the terminal device determines measurement information, and the measurement information includes the first The signal strength of the cell; the terminal device controls the cell reselection of the terminal device according to the cell reselection rule and the signal strength of the first cell.
  • the terminal device controls cell reselection of the terminal device according to the first information, which may be: the terminal device determines that the terminal device is associated with the first cell. Relationship; the terminal device determines not to perform cell reselection based on the cell reselection rule and the association relationship.
  • the method may further include: the terminal device receiving first indication information from the host wireless access node, wherein the first indication information indicates the location of the first cell.
  • the cell type is a relay cell.
  • the method may further include: the terminal device receiving a first identifier of the first cell from the host wireless access node; the terminal device receiving the first identifier according to the first identifier. Access the first cell.
  • the method may further include: the terminal device sending second indication information to the host wireless access node, the second indication information instructing the terminal device to communicate with the first The communities are related.
  • the method may further include: the terminal device determining, according to the first identification and status information, that the terminal device has an association relationship with the first cell, wherein the status The information includes location information of the terminal device and/or a location relationship between the terminal device and the relay wireless access node.
  • this application provides a communication method, which can be executed by an access and mobility management function network element, or by other devices including access and mobility management function network element functions, or by a chip system or other Function module execution, the chip system or functional module can realize the functions of access and mobility management functional network elements, the chip system or The functional module is, for example, provided in the access and mobility management functional network element.
  • the access and mobility management function network element is, for example, an AMF network element.
  • the method includes: the access and mobility management function network element determines second information, the second information is used for the terminal device to access the cell; wherein the second information includes the first identifier of the first cell or indicates the The terminal device has an association relationship with a first cell, the first cell is a cell that the terminal device currently accesses, the first cell corresponds to a relay wireless access node, and the relay wireless access node is a host A child node of a wireless access node; the access and mobility management network element sends the second information to the host wireless access node.
  • the second information determined by the access and mobility management function network element may be: the access and mobility management function network element receives data from the unified data management function network element or application The first identification of the functional network element.
  • the access and mobility management function network element determines the second information, which may be: the access and mobility management function network element receives access information from the UE, and the The access information includes the identification information of the first cell; the access and mobility management function network element receives third information from the unified data management function network element, and the third information includes one or more information associated with the UE. Identification information of a cell, the one or more cells including the first cell; the access and mobility management function network element determines the relationship between the UE and the third cell based on the access information and the third information. A neighborhood has an associated relationship.
  • the present application provides a communication device.
  • the communication device may be the host wireless access node described in any one of the above first to third aspects.
  • the communication device has the function of the above-mentioned host wireless access node.
  • the communication device is, for example, a host wireless access node, or a larger device including the host wireless access node, or a functional module in the host wireless access node, such as a baseband device or a chip system.
  • the communication device includes a baseband device and a radio frequency device.
  • the communication device includes a processing module (sometimes also called a processing unit) and a transceiver module (sometimes also called a transceiver unit). The transceiver module can realize the sending function and the receiving function.
  • the transceiver module When the transceiver module realizes the sending function, it can be called the sending module (sometimes also called the sending unit). When the transceiver module realizes the receiving function, it can be called the receiving module (sometimes also called the sending unit). receiving unit).
  • the sending module and the receiving module can be the same functional module, which is called the sending and receiving module. This functional module can realize the sending function and the receiving function; or the sending module and the receiving module can be different functional modules, and the sending and receiving module is responsible for these functions.
  • the host wireless access node is, for example, an IAB host node.
  • the processing module may be used to determine the first information, which is information related to the terminal device accessing a cell, wherein the cell currently accessed by the terminal device is corresponding to the relay wireless access node.
  • the relay wireless access node is a child node of the host wireless access node; and, the cell switching of the terminal device is controlled according to the first information.
  • the transceiver module (or sending module) may be used to send the first information to the terminal device.
  • the transceiver module may be configured to receive second indication information from the access and mobility management function network element or the terminal device, wherein the second indication information indicates that the terminal The device has an association relationship with the first cell; the host wireless access node determines the first information according to the second indication information.
  • the communication device further includes a storage unit (sometimes also referred to as a storage module), the processing unit is configured to be coupled with the storage unit and execute the program in the storage unit or Instructions enable the communication device to perform the functions of the host wireless access node described in any one of the above first to third aspects.
  • a storage unit sometimes also referred to as a storage module
  • the processing unit is configured to be coupled with the storage unit and execute the program in the storage unit or Instructions enable the communication device to perform the functions of the host wireless access node described in any one of the above first to third aspects.
  • the present application provides a communication device.
  • the communication device may be the above-mentioned first to third aspects any aspect of the terminal equipment.
  • the communication device has the function of the above-mentioned terminal device.
  • the communication device is, for example, a terminal device, or a larger device including the terminal device, or a functional module in the terminal device, such as a baseband device or a chip system.
  • the communication device includes a baseband device and a radio frequency device.
  • the communication device includes a processing module (sometimes also called a processing unit) and a transceiver module (sometimes also called a transceiver unit). The transceiver module can realize the sending function and the receiving function.
  • the transceiver module When the transceiver module realizes the sending function, it can be called the sending module (sometimes also called the sending unit). When the transceiver module realizes the receiving function, it can be called the receiving module (sometimes also called the sending unit). receiving unit).
  • the sending module and the receiving module can be the same functional module, which is called the sending and receiving module. This functional module can realize the sending function and the receiving function; or the sending module and the receiving module can be different functional modules, and the sending and receiving module is responsible for these functions. The collective name for functional modules.
  • the transceiver module may be used to receive first information from the host wireless access node, where the first information is information related to the terminal device accessing the cell, wherein the terminal device is currently The accessed cell is the first cell of the relay wireless access node, and the relay wireless access node is a child node of the host wireless access node.
  • the processing module may be configured to control cell reselection of the terminal device according to the first information.
  • the transceiver module (or sending module) may be configured to send second indication information to the host wireless access node, where the second indication information indicates that the terminal device has an association relationship with the first cell. .
  • the communication device further includes a storage unit (sometimes also called a storage module), the processing unit is configured to be coupled with the storage unit and execute the program in the storage unit or Instructions enable the communication device to perform the functions of the terminal device described in any one of the above first to third aspects.
  • a storage unit sometimes also called a storage module
  • the processing unit is configured to be coupled with the storage unit and execute the program in the storage unit or Instructions enable the communication device to perform the functions of the terminal device described in any one of the above first to third aspects.
  • the present application provides a communication device.
  • the communication device may be the access and mobility management function network element described in any one of the above first to third aspects.
  • the communication device has the functions of the above-mentioned access and mobility management function network element.
  • the communication device is, for example, an access and mobility management functional network element, or a larger device including an access and mobility management functional network element, or a functional module in an access and mobility management functional network element, for example Baseband device or chip system, etc.
  • the communication device includes a baseband device and a radio frequency device.
  • the communication device includes a processing module (sometimes also called a processing unit) and a transceiver module (sometimes also called a transceiver unit).
  • the transceiver module can realize the sending function and the receiving function.
  • the sending module sometimes also called the sending unit.
  • the receiving module sometimes also called the sending unit.
  • the sending module and the receiving module can be the same functional module, which is called the sending and receiving module.
  • This functional module can realize the sending function and the receiving function; or the sending module and the receiving module can be different functional modules, and the sending and receiving module is responsible for these functions.
  • the access and mobility management function network element is, for example, an AMF network element.
  • the processing module may be used to determine second information, the second information is used for the terminal device to access the cell; wherein the second information includes the first identification of the first cell and/or indicates that the terminal device It has an association relationship with a first cell, the first cell is a cell currently accessed by the terminal device, the first cell corresponds to a relay wireless access node, and the relay wireless access node is a host wireless access node.
  • the transceiver module (or sending module) may be used to send the second information to the host wireless access node.
  • the transceiver module (or receiving module) may be configured to receive the second information from a unified data management function network element or an application function network element.
  • the communication device further includes a storage unit (sometimes also called a storage module), the processing unit is configured to be coupled with the storage unit and execute the program in the storage unit or Instructions to enable the communication device to execute the access and mobility management function network element described in any one of the above first to third aspects. function.
  • a storage unit sometimes also called a storage module
  • the processing unit is configured to be coupled with the storage unit and execute the program in the storage unit or Instructions to enable the communication device to execute the access and mobility management function network element described in any one of the above first to third aspects. function.
  • the present application provides a communication system, including at least one of the communication device described in the fourth aspect, the communication device described in the fifth aspect, or the communication device described in the sixth aspect.
  • the present application provides a computer-readable storage medium, the computer-readable storage medium is used to store computer programs or instructions, and when executed, the host wireless access node, terminal device or Methods executed by access and mobility management functional network elements are implemented.
  • the present application provides a computer program product containing instructions, which, when run on a computer, enables the methods described in the above aspects to be implemented.
  • this application provides a chip system, including a processor and an interface.
  • the processor is configured to call and run instructions from the interface, so that the chip system implements the methods of the above aspects.
  • Figure 1 is an architectural diagram of a 5G network
  • FIG. 2 is a schematic diagram of an independent networking scenario of the IAB network applicable to the embodiment of the present application
  • FIG. 3 is a schematic diagram of the non-independent networking scenario of the IAB network applicable to the embodiment of the present application
  • Figure 4 is a schematic diagram of an application scenario applicable to the embodiment of the present application.
  • Figure 5 is a schematic flow chart of a communication method provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • Figure 6A is a schematic diagram of establishing an association relationship between a UE and a first cell provided by an embodiment of the present application
  • Figure 6B is a schematic diagram of the disassociation relationship between the UE and the first cell provided by the embodiment of the present application.
  • Figure 7 is another schematic flow diagram of a communication method provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • Figure 8 is a schematic flowchart of yet another communication method provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 9 is a schematic flowchart of yet another communication method provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • Figure 10 is a schematic structural diagram of a communication device provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • Figure 11 is another structural schematic diagram of a communication device provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • Figure 12 is another structural schematic diagram of a communication device provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 13 is another structural schematic diagram of a communication device provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • Host wireless access point which can also be called host node, host base station (donor base station), or integrated access and backhaul (IAB) host node, etc.
  • host wireless access point which can also be called host node, host base station (donor base station), or integrated access and backhaul (IAB) host node, etc.
  • IAB integrated access and backhaul
  • Host wireless access nodes are typically connected to the core network through wired links (such as fiber optic cables).
  • the host wireless access node may be responsible for receiving data from the core network and forwarding it to the wireless backhaul device, or receiving data from the wireless backhaul device and forwarding it to the core network.
  • the host wireless access node can generally be connected to the network through wired means.
  • the host wireless access node may include a radio network controller (RNC), a Node B (NB), a base station controller (BSC), a base transceiver station (base transceiver) station, BTS), home base station (e.g., home evolved NodeB, or home Node B, HNB), base band unit (BBU), etc., which may also include evolutionary base stations (NodeB or eNB or e-NodeB, evolutionary Node B) in the evolved LTE system (LTE-Advanced, LTE-A), or It may also include the next generation node B (next generation node B, gNB) in the fifth generation mobile communication technology (fifth generation, 5G) new radio (new radio, NR) system, etc.
  • RNC radio network controller
  • NB Node B
  • BSC base station controller
  • base transceiver station base transceiver station
  • BTS home base station
  • home base station e.g., home evolved NodeB, or home Node B, HNB
  • the host wireless access node may include a centralized unit (CU) and a distributed unit (DU).
  • CU is the logic that carries the radio resource control (RRC), service data adaptation protocol (SDAP) and packet data convergence protocol (PDCP) of the host wireless access node.
  • RRC radio resource control
  • SDAP service data adaptation protocol
  • PDCP packet data convergence protocol
  • DU is a logical node that carries the radio link control (RLC), media access control (MAC) and physical layer of the host wireless access node.
  • the CU is connected to the DU it controls through the F1 interface.
  • the F1 interface is used to transmit the lower-layer configuration information of the wireless bearer between the CU and the DU, and to establish a GTP tunnel between the DU and the CU for each wireless bearer.
  • the F1 interface may further include a control plane interface (F1-C) and a user plane interface (F1-U).
  • the CU and the core network are connected through the next generation (NG) interface.
  • CU can also exist in the form of separation of user plane (UP) (such as CU-UP) and control plane (CP) (such as CU-CP), that is, CU is composed of CU- Composed of CP and CU-UP.
  • a CU may include one CU-CP and at least one CU-UP.
  • the function of the host wireless access node may be implemented by hardware components inside the host wireless access node, for example, a processor and/or a programmable chip inside the host wireless access node.
  • the chip can be implemented by an application-specific integrated circuit (ASIC) or a programmable logic device (PLD).
  • ASIC application-specific integrated circuit
  • PLD programmable logic device
  • the above-mentioned PLD can be a complex programmable logical device (CPLD), a field-programmable gate array (FPGA), a general array logic (GAL), a system on a chip (system on a chip) , SOC) or any combination thereof.
  • CPLD complex programmable logical device
  • FPGA field-programmable gate array
  • GAL general array logic
  • SOC system on a chip
  • the host wireless access node as an IAB host node as an example.
  • Relay wireless access point which can also be called relay node, wireless backhaul device, or IAB node, etc., refers to the node located between the host wireless access node and the terminal device.
  • the relay wireless access node can be responsible for forwarding data from the terminal device to the host wireless access node and forwarding the host wireless access node to the core network, or receiving core network data from the host wireless access node and transmitting the data. forwarded to the terminal device.
  • the relay wireless access node may include a mobile terminal (mobile termination, MT) part and a distributed unit (distributed unit, DU) part.
  • MT mobile terminal
  • DU distributed unit
  • the relay wireless access node faces its parent node (that is, the previous hop node of the relay wireless access node)
  • it can be regarded as a terminal device, that is, it plays the role of MT
  • the relay wireless access node faces its child node (that is, the next hop node of the relay wireless access node, the child node may be another relay wireless access node, or it may be a terminal device)
  • the network device plays the role of DU.
  • the MT part of the relay wireless access node may have some or all of the functions of the terminal device.
  • the DU part of the relay wireless access node can include the functions of the physical layer (PHY)/MAC layer/RLC layer, communicate with the sub-nodes, and provide access services for the sub-nodes.
  • PHY physical layer
  • RLC backhaul adaptation protocol
  • BAP backhaul adaptation protocol
  • the relay wireless access node can also be called user premises equipment (customer premises equipment, CPE), the relay wireless access node can also have other names, which is not limited by this application.
  • CPE customer premises equipment
  • the function of the relay wireless access node may be implemented by hardware components inside the relay wireless access node, for example, a processor and/or a programmable chip inside the relay wireless access node.
  • the chip can be implemented by ASIC, or PLD.
  • PLD can be any one of CPLD, FPGA, GAL, SOC or any combination thereof.
  • the relay wireless access node as an IAB node as an example.
  • Cell also called cellular cell, refers to the area covered by one of the wireless access nodes or part of the wireless access nodes (sector antenna) in the cellular mobile communication system. In this area, terminal equipment can pass through Wireless channels communicate reliably with wireless access nodes.
  • the cell type of the cell corresponding to the relay wireless access node may be called a relay cell.
  • the relay cell refers to the area covered by the relay wireless access node. In this area, the terminal equipment does not directly communicate with the host wireless access node, but communicates with the host wireless access node through the forwarding of the relay wireless access node. Ingress node to communicate.
  • the non-relay cell involved in the embodiments of this application that is, the ordinary cell, refers to the area covered by the wireless access node. In this area, the terminal equipment directly communicates with the wireless access node without the need for relay wireless access. node forwards.
  • Terminal equipment is a device that provides voice and/or data connectivity to users.
  • the terminal device involved in this application may be a terminal device or a terminal, or a hardware component inside the terminal device that can implement the functions of the terminal device.
  • the terminal device may be called a user equipment (UE), a mobile station (MS), a mobile terminal (MT), etc., and may include, for example, a handheld device with a wireless connection function. device, or processing device connected to a wireless modem.
  • the terminal can communicate with the core network via the radio access network (RAN) and exchange voice and/or data with the RAN.
  • RAN radio access network
  • terminal devices are: personal communication service (PCS) phones, cordless phones, session initiation protocol (SIP) phones, wireless local loop (WLL) stations, personal digital assistants (personal digital assistant, PDA), barcode, radio frequency identification (RFID), sensors, satellite navigation systems, such as global positioning system (global positioning system, GPS), Beidou positioning system, laser scanners and other information sensing equipment and other equipment.
  • PCS personal communication service
  • SIP session initiation protocol
  • WLL wireless local loop
  • PDA personal digital assistants
  • RFID radio frequency identification
  • sensors satellite navigation systems, such as global positioning system (global positioning system, GPS), Beidou positioning system, laser scanners and other information sensing equipment and other equipment.
  • Terminal devices can also be wearable devices.
  • Wearable devices can also be called wearable smart devices. It is a general term for applying wearable technology to intelligently design daily wear and develop wearable devices, such as glasses, gloves, watches, clothing and shoes, etc.
  • a wearable device is a portable device that is worn directly on the body or integrated into the user's clothing or accessories.
  • Wearable devices are not just hardware devices, but also achieve powerful functions through software support, data interaction, and cloud interaction.
  • Broadly defined wearable smart devices include full-featured, large-sized devices that can achieve complete or partial functions without relying on smartphones, such as smart watches or smart glasses, and those that only focus on a certain type of application function and need to cooperate with other devices such as smartphones. Used, such as various smart bracelets, smart helmets, smart jewelry, etc.
  • the terminal can also be a virtual reality (VR) device, an augmented reality (AR) device, a wireless terminal in industrial control (industrial control), a wireless terminal in self-driving (self driving), or remote surgery Wireless terminals in remote medical surgery, wireless terminals in smart grid, wireless terminals in transportation safety, wireless terminals in smart city, and smart home Wireless terminals, terminal equipment in the future evolved public land mobile network (PLMN), or vehicle equipment in the Internet of Vehicles (vehicle to everything, V2X), customer premises equipment (CPE) )wait.
  • the terminal equipment can also be a vehicle-mounted terminal equipment, For example, terminal equipment located on the vehicle (for example, placed or installed in the vehicle), such as medical equipment on the ambulance, vehicle-mounted cameras, etc.
  • the vehicle-mounted terminal device is also called an on-board unit (OBU), for example.
  • OBU on-board unit
  • the functions of the terminal device may be implemented by hardware components inside the terminal device, and the hardware components may be processors and/or programmable chips inside the terminal device.
  • the chip can be implemented by ASIC, or PLD.
  • the above-mentioned PLD can be any one of CPLD, FPGA, GAL, SOC or any combination thereof.
  • “Multiple” in the embodiments of this application means two or more.
  • “plurality” in the embodiments of this application can also be understood as “at least two”.
  • “At least one” can be understood as one or more, for example, one, two or more.
  • including at least one means including one, two or more, and it does not limit which ones are included.
  • it includes at least one of A, B and C, then it can include A, B, C, A and B, A and C, B and C, or A and B and C.
  • “And/or” describes the relationship between related objects, indicating that there can be three relationships.
  • a and/or B can mean: A exists alone, A and B exist simultaneously, and B exists alone.
  • the character "/" unless otherwise specified, generally indicates that the related objects are in an "or” relationship.
  • the terms "system” and “network” in the embodiments of this application may be used interchangeably.
  • ordinal numbers such as “first” and “second” mentioned in the embodiments of this application are used to distinguish multiple objects and are not used to limit the order, timing, priority or importance of multiple objects.
  • the technical solutions of the embodiments of the present application can be applied to various communication systems, such as long term evolution (long term evolution, LTE) systems, LTE frequency division duplex (FDD) systems, and LTE time division duplex systems.
  • LTE long term evolution
  • FDD frequency division duplex
  • TDD time division duplex
  • 5G fifth generation
  • NR new radio
  • Figure 1 shows the architecture of a 5G communication system, which may include: (wireless) access network ((R)AN in Figure 1), terminal equipment and core network.
  • the (wireless) access network may include access network elements.
  • the terminal device is described by taking a UE as an example.
  • the access network element which may also be called an access network device, is a device with wireless transceiver functions and is used to communicate with terminal devices.
  • the access network elements include but are not limited to base stations (base transceiver station (BTS), Node B, eNodeB/eNB, or gNodeB/gNB), transceiver points (transmission reception point, TRP), third Base stations for the subsequent evolution of the 3rd generation partnership project (3GPP), access nodes in wireless fidelity (Wi-Fi) systems, wireless relay nodes, wireless backhaul nodes, etc.
  • the base station may be: a macro base station, a micro base station, a pico base station, a small station, a relay station, etc.
  • a base station may contain one or more co-located or non-co-located transmission and reception points.
  • the access network element may also be a wireless controller, a centralized unit (CU), and/or a distributed unit (DU) in a cloud radio access network (cloud radio access network, CRAN) scenario.
  • the access network element in vehicle to everything (V2X) technology can be a road side unit (RSU).
  • the following description takes the access network element as a base station as an example.
  • the base station can communicate with the terminal device or communicate with the terminal device through the relay station. Terminal devices can communicate with multiple base stations in different access technologies.
  • the core network equipment includes but is not limited to implementing mobility management, data processing, session management, policy and billing equipment with other functions.
  • the core network equipment may include network exposure function (NEF) network elements, policy control function (PCF) network elements, unified data management (UDM), application Function (application function, AF) network element, access and mobility management function (AMF) network element, session management function (SMF) network element, user plane function, UPF) network elements, etc.
  • NEF network exposure function
  • PCF policy control function
  • UDM unified data management
  • application Function application function, AF
  • AMF access and mobility management function
  • SMF session management function
  • UPF user plane function
  • Access and mobility management function network elements may include managing user registration, SMF network element selection, mobility management, access authentication/authorization, etc.
  • the access and mobility management function network element can be an AMF network element, as shown in Figure 1; in future communication systems, such as the 6G communication system, the access and mobility management function network element will still be It may be an AMF network element, or it may have other names, which are not limited in the embodiment of this application.
  • the unified data management network element is responsible for the management of user identification, contract data, authentication data, and user service network element registration management.
  • the unified data management network element can be a UDM network element, as shown in Figure 1; in future communications, such as a 6G communication system, the unified data management network element can still be a UDM network element, or have Other names are not limited in the embodiments of this application.
  • the application function network element can be an AF network element, which represents the application function of a third party or operator. It is the interface for the 5G network to obtain external application data, and is mainly used to transmit application side information to the network. side needs. It should be understood that in future communications, such as 6G communication systems, the application function network element can still be an AF network element, or have other names, which are not limited by the embodiments of this application.
  • each network element in the core network can be either a network element implemented on dedicated hardware, a software instance running on dedicated hardware, or an instance of a virtualization function on an appropriate platform, for example, the above-mentioned virtualization
  • the platform can be a cloud platform.
  • each network element in the core network can also be called a functional entity or device.
  • a user plane functional network element can also be called a user plane functional entity or a user plane functional device
  • a policy control functional network element can also be called a policy.
  • Control function entity or policy control function device, unified data management network element may also be called unified data management entity or unified data management device.
  • Nnef, Namf, Npcf, Nsmf, Nudm, Naf, N1, N2, N3, N4, and N6 are interface serial numbers. The meaning of these interface serial numbers can be found in the meaning defined in the 3GPP standard protocol, and is not limited here.
  • the embodiments of the present application are not limited to the communication system shown in Figure 1.
  • the names of the network elements shown in Figure 1 are only used as an example here and are not used as a communication system architecture applicable to the methods of the embodiments of the present application. Limitation of network elements included in .
  • the names of devices that implement core network functions in systems with different access technologies may be different, and the embodiments of this application do not limit this.
  • the communication system shown in Figure 1 does not constitute a limitation of the communication systems to which the embodiments of the present application can be applied.
  • the communication system architecture shown in Figure 1 is a 5G system architecture.
  • the technical solutions provided by the embodiments of this application can be applied not only to the 5G system, but also to the fourth generation mobile communication technology (the 4th generation, 4G). systems, such as LTE systems, or can also be applied to next-generation mobile communication systems or other similar communication systems, without specific limitations.
  • the network elements involved in the embodiments of this application will be described by taking the network element shown in Figure 1 as an example, and the XX network element will be directly referred to as XX.
  • the AMF network element will be referred to as AMF
  • the UDM network element will be referred to as XX.
  • the network element is abbreviated as UDM
  • the AF network element is abbreviated as AF, etc.
  • the names of all network elements in the embodiments of this application are only as examples, and they may also be called other names in future communications, or in future communications, the network elements involved in the embodiments of this application may also be named by other entities with the same functions. Or equipment, etc., which are not limited in the embodiments of the present application. A unified explanation is given here and will not be repeated later.
  • FIGS 2 and 3 respectively show a schematic diagram of the standalone networking (SA) scenario of the IAB network and a schematic diagram of the non-standalone networking (NSA) scenario of the IAB network.
  • SA standalone networking
  • NSA non-standalone networking
  • the independent networking scenario refers to that both the IAB node and the terminal device establish connections with the network through the air interface of the same communication format (for example, NR format).
  • the non-independent networking scenario refers to that the IAB node and the terminal device establish a connection with the network through the air interface of two or more communication standards.
  • the parent node of the IAB node is the IAB host node. It should be understood that one or more IAB nodes may be included between the UE and the IAB host node. In Figure 2, one IAB node is taken as an example.
  • the IAB host node After the UE's uplink data is transmitted to the IAB host node through one or more IAB nodes, the IAB host node then sends it to the mobile network element device (such as the UPF network element in the 5G core network (5G core, 5GC)).
  • the UE's downlink data packet is received by the IAB host node from the mobile gateway device, and then sent to the UE through one or more IAB nodes.
  • IAB host node shown can also form a dual connection with an IAB node under another IAB host node to provide services for terminal devices. There are many similar examples, so I won’t list them all here.
  • FIG 3 is a schematic diagram of the non-standalone (NSA) scenario of the IAB network provided by the embodiment of the present application.
  • the IAB node supports dual connectivity of 4G and 5G networks, that is, evolved universal terrestrial wireless access and new air interface dual connectivity (E-UTRAN NR dual connectivity, EN-DC), in which the LTE base station eNB is the main base station , providing LTE air interface (LTE Uu) connection for IAB nodes, and establishing an S1 interface with the 4G core network evolved packet core (EPC) for user plane and control plane transmission.
  • E-UTRAN NR dual connectivity EN-DC
  • LTE base station eNB is the main base station
  • LTE air interface (LTE Uu) connection for IAB nodes
  • EPC 4G core network evolved packet core
  • the IAB host node is a secondary base station, which provides NR air interface (NR Uu) connection for the IAB node, and establishes an S1 interface with the core network EPC for user plane transmission.
  • UE also supports EN-DC.
  • the UE is connected to the main base station eNB through the LTE Uu interface and the secondary base station IAB node through the NR Uu interface.
  • the secondary base station of the UE can also be an IAB host node.
  • the non-independent networking scenario shown in Figure 3 can also be called the IAB EN-DC networking scenario.
  • This networking scenario is just an example of the non-independent networking scenario.
  • the non-independent networking scenario can also support multi-hop networking, that is, the IAB node is connected to the IAB host node (specifically, the IAB host) via at least one intermediate IAB node (or through a multi-hop wireless backhaul link).
  • the DU of the node, that is, IAB donor DU) Figure 3 takes an IAB node as an example.
  • an introduction to the IAB host node please refer to the aforementioned introduction to the host wireless access node
  • an introduction to the IAB node please refer to the aforementioned introduction to the relay wireless access node, which will not be described again here.
  • the embodiment of the present application relates to a scenario in which the UE and the IAB node move synchronously (or simultaneously), but the embodiment of the present application is not limited thereto.
  • Figure 4 shows an application scenario to which this application is applicable.
  • the UE establishes a connection with the IAB host node 1 through the IAB node 1, and accesses the 5GC through the IAB host node 1; after that, the UE and the IAB node 1 Synchronous movement.
  • the IAB node 1 can switch from the IAB host node 1 to the IAB host node 2. That is, the UE accesses the 5GC through the IAB host node 2.
  • the synchronous movement of UE and IAB node 1 can not only trigger the handover of the IAB host node but also trigger the cell handover.
  • the UE sends measurement information to the IAB host node 1. If the measurement information indicates that the signal strength of the cell corresponding to IAB node 2 is higher than the signal strength of the cell corresponding to IAB node 1, then IAB host node 1 may instruct the UE to switch from the cell corresponding to IAB node 1 to the cell corresponding to IAB node 2. As the UE and IAB node 1 continue to move synchronously, the signal strength of the cell corresponding to the IAB node 1 may be higher than the signal strength of the cell corresponding to the IAB node 2.
  • the IAB host node 1 may instruct the UE again to switch from the cell corresponding to IAB node 2 back to the cell corresponding to IAB node 1. It can be seen that during the synchronous movement of the UE and the IAB node 1, the UE will perform multiple cell handovers. These multiple cell handovers will produce a large delay and are not conducive to the stability of the UE communication.
  • embodiments of the present application provide a communication method and device, including the host wireless access node determining first information, and controlling the cell switching of the terminal device based on the first information, which means that the host wireless access node determines the terminal device.
  • a judgment condition is added, which can reduce the number of switching times of the terminal equipment. For example, in the process of synchronous movement of the relay wireless access node and the terminal device, the host wireless access node can no longer frequently trigger the terminal device to perform cell switching based only on the signal strength of the cell, even if there are other cells whose signal strengths are higher than the middle one.
  • the host wireless access node follows the signal strength of the cell corresponding to the wireless access node, the host wireless access node also needs to consider the first information to determine whether to switch, thereby reducing the number of switching times of the terminal device and reducing the delay caused by multiple switchings, which can improve the terminal The stability of device communication.
  • the first information is information related to the terminal device accessing the cell. The host wireless node controls the cell switching of the terminal device according to the first information, which can make the control result more accurate, so that the terminal device can perform cell switching at an appropriate time.
  • the host wireless access node involved in various embodiments of this application may be the IAB host node in Figure 2 or Figure 3 or Figure 4; the relay wireless access node involved in various embodiments of this application may be 2 or the IAB node in Figure 3 or Figure 4; the terminal equipment involved in various embodiments of the present application may be the UE in Figure 1, Figure 2, or Figure 3 or Figure 4; the interface involved in various embodiments of the present application
  • the access and mobility management function network element may be the AMF in Figure 1; the unified data management network element involved in various embodiments of this application may be the UDM in Figure 1; the application function network involved in various embodiments of this application
  • the element can be AF in Figure 1.
  • the host wireless access node can be replaced by an IAB host node
  • the relay wireless access node can be replaced by an IAB node
  • the terminal device can be replaced by UE
  • the access and mobility can be replaced.
  • the performance management function network element is replaced by AMF
  • the application function network element is replaced by AF
  • the unified data management network element is replaced by UDM.
  • the embodiments of this application are described by taking an application scenario in which a terminal device and a relay wireless access node move synchronously as an example.
  • the relay wireless access node that moves synchronously with the terminal device or the wireless access node that carries the terminal device and moves synchronously may be replaced by IAB node 1.
  • the terminal equipment With the synchronous movement of IAB node 1 and the terminal equipment, the terminal equipment may be triggered to perform cell switching and host wireless access node switching (as shown in Figure 4).
  • the relay wireless access node corresponding to the cell after the terminal device is switched can be replaced by IAB node 2; the host wireless access node corresponding to IAB node 1 before movement can be replaced by IAB.
  • the host wireless access node corresponding to the IAB node 1 can be understood as the IAB node 1 accessing the 5GC through the host wireless access node.
  • the host wireless access node can be the parent node of the IAB node 1. Or there are one or more other relay wireless access nodes between the host wireless access node and the IAB node 1.
  • descriptions will be made taking the IAB node 1 as a child node of the host wireless access node as an example.
  • Figure 5 is a schematic flowchart of a communication method provided by an embodiment of the present application. As shown in Figure 5, the method may include the following content.
  • IAB node 1 establishes a connection with IAB host node 1.
  • IAB node 1 may be a child node of IAB host node 1, or there may be at least one other IAB node between IAB node 1 and IAB host node 1, which is not limited in the embodiment of this application.
  • IAB node 1 is a child node of IAB host node 1 as an example.
  • the IAB node 1 establishes a connection with the IAB host node 1, and accesses the 5GC through the IAB host node 1.
  • the embodiment of this application does not limit the specific implementation process of establishing the connection between the IAB node 1 and the IAB host node 1.
  • the IAB host node 1 can allocate cell resources to the IAB node 1 .
  • IAB host node 1 may allocate one or more cells to IAB node 1 . Any one of the one or more cells may be used for communication between IAB node 1 and IAB host node 1, or for communication between a child node of IAB node 1 (such as UE or other IAB node) and IAB host node 1. communication between.
  • the IAB host node 1 allocates a cell to the IAB node 1 as an example.
  • the cell corresponding to the IAB node 1 can be understood as the cell allocated by the IAB host node 1 to the IAB node 1 .
  • the cell corresponding to IAB node 1 is called the first cell in the following embodiments.
  • the IAB host node 1 may send the identification information of the first cell to the IAB node 1, and accordingly, the IAB node 1 receives the identification information of the first cell.
  • the first cell can be used for communication between a child node of the IAB node 1 (such as a UE or other IAB node) and the IAB host node 1 .
  • the cell type of the first cell is a relay cell. For the description of the relay cell, please refer to the foregoing description and will not be repeated here.
  • the identification information of the first cell may include the first identification.
  • the first identification may be related to the IAB node 1 and be an identification identifiable (or readable) by the user.
  • the first identification may be the No. 509 bus IAB community.
  • IAB host node 1 may determine the first identification. For example, the IAB host node 1 may configure a first identity for the cell corresponding to the IAB node 1 (ie, the first cell) according to the identity information of the IAB node 1 . For another example, IAB host node 1 may receive the first identifier from the AMF corresponding to IAB node 1 (hereinafter, the AMF corresponding to IAB node 1 is recorded as AMF 1).
  • the IAB node 1 may send the identification information of the IAB node 1 to the AMF 1.
  • the IAB node 1 sends the identification information of the IAB node 1 to the AMF 1 during the registration process, but this is not limited in the embodiment of the present application.
  • AMF 1 may determine the first identity of the cell corresponding to the IAB node 1.
  • AMF 1 may configure a first identity for the cell corresponding to IAB node 1 based on the identity information of IAB node 1, or AMF 1 may receive the first identity from UDM or AF.
  • the subscription information of IAB node 1 includes the first identifier.
  • the AF may configure the first identity for the cell corresponding to the IAB node 1 based on the identity information of the IAB node 1 .
  • the UDM or AF may proactively send the first identity to AMF 1, or may send the first identity to AMF 1 after receiving a request message from AMF 1 for obtaining the first identity.
  • AMF 1 may send second information to IAB host node 1, where the second information includes the first identifier, such as sending the second information to IAB host node 1 through an N2 message; Accordingly, the IAB host node 1 receives the second information and obtains the first identification.
  • AMF 1 may actively send the second information to IAB host node 1, or may send the second information to IAB host node 1 after receiving a request message from IAB host node 1 for obtaining the first identity.
  • the second information is not limited by the embodiments of this application.
  • S502 The UE establishes a connection with the IAB host node 1 through the IAB node 1.
  • the UE can establish a connection with the IAB node 1, and establish a connection with the IAB host node 1 through the IAB node 1. For example, to establish an RRC connection, access the 5GC through the IAB host node 1. In this embodiment, the UE passes the IAB
  • the specific implementation process of establishing a connection between node 1 and IAB host node 1 is not limited.
  • the UE establishes a connection with the IAB host node 1 by accessing the first cell.
  • the UE may receive the identification information of the first cell from the IAB host node 1.
  • the IAB host node 1 broadcasts the identification information of the first cell through the IAB node 1, and the UE accesses the first cell based on the identification information of the first cell.
  • the UE may send the identification information of the first cell to the IAB host node 1, such as sending the identification information of the first cell to the IAB host node 1 through an RRC message.
  • the IAB host node 1 may determine that the UE is a child node of the IAB node 1 based on the identification information of the first cell, or determine that the UE is a terminal device that accesses the first cell through the IAB node 1 . It should be understood that the UE may send the identification information of the first cell to the IAB host node 1 after accessing the first cell, or the UE may also send the first cell identification information to the IAB host node 1 during the process of accessing the first cell. identification information, which is not limited in the embodiments of this application.
  • the UE accesses the first cell, that is, accesses the 5GC through the IAB host node 1.
  • the IAB host node 1 determines the first information, which is information related to the UE's access to the cell.
  • the IAB host node 1 may determine the first information, which is information related to the UE's access to the cell, such as information related to the UE's access to the relay cell.
  • the first information can be used for the IAB host node 1 to control the cell switching of the UE.
  • the first information includes cell switching rules (or called relay cell switching rules); or the first information can be used for
  • the UE controls cell reselection, for example, the first information includes cell reselection rules (also known as relay cell reselection rules); or the first information can be used by the IAB host node 1 to control the cell handover of the UE and for the UE to control cell reselection. selection, for example, the first information includes cell switching rules and cell reselection rules.
  • the IAB host node 1 may determine the cell switching rule.
  • the cell switching rules may include, for example, but are not limited to one or more of the following rules.
  • Cell handover rule 1 UE does not perform cell handover.
  • the priority of the cell currently accessed by the UE (the first cell is taken as an example below) is higher than the priority of other cells, which means that no matter whether there are other cells whose signal strength is higher than that of the first cell, Strength, the UE does not perform cell switching. This allows the UE to maintain the connection relationship with the IAB node 1 during the synchronous movement with the IAB node 1, thereby preventing the UE from performing unnecessary cell switching.
  • Cell switching rule 2 the signal strength of the first cell is greater than or equal to the first threshold, and the UE does not perform cell switching.
  • the signal strength of the first cell is greater than or equal to the first threshold and can meet the communication requirements of the UE. Even if the signal strength of other cells is higher than the signal strength of the first cell, the UE will not perform cell switching. This can reduce cell switching during the synchronous movement of the UE and the IAB node 1, thereby reducing the delay caused by multiple cell switching and improving communication stability and user experience.
  • Cell switching rule 3 the signal strength of the first cell is less than or equal to the second threshold, and the UE performs cell switching.
  • the UE performs cell switching to meet the communication requirements of the UE.
  • Cell switching rule 4 The first cell has an association relationship (or binding relationship) with the UE, and the UE does not perform cell switching.
  • the priority of the first cell associated with the UE is higher than the priority of other cells. Regardless of whether the signal strength of other cells is higher than the signal strength of the first cell, the UE will not perform cell switching. , this allows the UE to maintain the connection relationship between the IAB node 1 corresponding to its associated cell during the synchronous movement of the UE and the IAB node 1, thereby preventing the UE from performing unnecessary cell switching.
  • Cell switching rule 5 the first cell has an association relationship with the UE, and the signal strength of the first cell is greater than or equal to the fifth threshold, the UE does not perform cell switching.
  • the first cell has an associated relationship with the UE, and the signal strength of the first cell is greater than or equal to the fifth threshold, which meets the communication requirements of the UE, even if there are other cells whose signal strengths are higher than those of the first cell.
  • Strength the UE does not perform cell switching, which can reduce cell switching during the synchronous movement of the UE and IAB node 1, thereby reducing the delay caused by multiple cell switching, and improving communication stability and user experience.
  • Cell switching rule 6 the first cell has an association relationship with the UE, and the signal strength of the first cell is less than or equal to the sixth threshold, the UE performs cell switching.
  • the first cell has an association relationship with the UE, but the signal strength of the first cell is less than or equal to the sixth threshold and does not meet the communication requirements of the UE, then the UE can perform cell switching to meet the communication requirements of the UE. .
  • the first cell in the above cell handover rule can be understood as the cell currently accessed by the UE.
  • the first cell please refer to the relevant contents of S501 and S502, which will not be described again here.
  • the above-mentioned first threshold, second threshold, fifth threshold and sixth threshold may be predefined or configured by the IAB host node 1, which is not limited in the embodiment of the present application.
  • the first threshold may be greater than or equal to the second threshold.
  • the first threshold is equal to the second threshold, then the signal strength of the first cell is greater than or equal to the first threshold, the UE does not perform cell switching, and the signal strength of the first cell is less than the first threshold, the UE performs cell switching; or, the first If the signal strength of the cell is greater than the first threshold, the UE does not perform cell switching, but if the signal strength of the first cell is less than or equal to the first threshold, the UE performs cell switching; this is not limited in the embodiments of the present application.
  • the fifth threshold may be greater than or equal to the sixth threshold.
  • the fifth threshold being equal to the sixth threshold, please refer to the relevant description of the first threshold being equal to the second threshold, which will not be described again here.
  • the embodiment of this application takes a cell corresponding to IAB node 1 as an example to describe, then the UE has an association relationship with the first cell, which can also be understood as the UE has an association relationship with the IAB node 1.
  • the association relationship between the UE and the first cell can be understood as a synchronous movement relationship between the UE and the IAB node 1; or it can be understood as a relationship between the UE establishing a connection with the IAB host node 1 through the IAB node 1; or it can be understood as a relationship between the UE and the IAB host node 1.
  • the IAB host node 1 can configure cell switching rules for the UE.
  • IAB host node 1 may configure cell switching rules for UEs that access the first cell through IAB node 1.
  • the IAB host node 1 may receive the identification information of the first cell from the UE, determine based on the identification information of the first cell that the UE is a terminal device that accesses the first cell through the IAB node 1, and configure the cell for the UE. Switch rules. It should be understood that the specific implementation manner in which the IAB host node 1 determines that the UE is a terminal device that accesses the first cell through the IAB node 1 is not limited to this.
  • the IAB host node 1 can configure one or more of the following rules for the UE that the IAB node 1 accesses the first cell: the UE does not perform cell switching; the signal strength of the first cell is greater than or equal to the first threshold, and the UE does not perform cell switching. Cell switching; or, the signal strength of the first cell is less than or equal to the second threshold, and the UE performs cell switching.
  • the IAB host node 1 may receive second indication information from the AMF corresponding to the UE (hereinafter referred to as AMF 2).
  • the second indication information may be used to indicate that the UE has an association relationship with the first cell; and, the IAB host node Node 1 determines (or configures) cell switching rules according to the second indication information.
  • AMF 2 may determine second information, which may indicate that the UE has an association relationship with the first cell, and send the second information to IAB host node 1 (or second indication information), such as sending the second information to the IAB host node through the N2 message.
  • the IAB host node 1 can configure one or more of the following rules according to the association relationship between the UE and the first cell: the UE has an association relationship with the first cell, and the UE does not perform cell switching; the UE has an association relationship with the first cell. If the UE has an association relationship with the first cell, but the signal strength of the first cell is less than or equal to the sixth threshold, the UE will not perform cell switching. Cell switching.
  • the specific implementation process of AMF 2 determining the second information may include but is not limited to the following: AMF 2 receives access information from the UE. For example, the UE may send the access information to AMF 2 during the registration process.
  • the access information includes The identification information of the first cell (and/or the identification information of the IAB node 1); AMF 2 obtains the third information from the UDM.
  • the third information is, for example, the subscription information of the UE.
  • the third information includes the association relationship with the UE.
  • Identification information of one or more cells (and/or identification information of one or more IAB nodes that are associated with the UE), where one or more cells include the first cell (and/or one or more IAB nodes)
  • the node includes an IAB node 1); further, the AMF 2 can determine the second information according to the access information and the third information, that is, determine that there is an association relationship between the UE and the first cell.
  • the UDM may actively send the third information to AMF 2, or may send the third information to AMF 2 after receiving a request message from AMF 2 for obtaining the third information. This is not limited in the embodiments of this application.
  • the IAB host node 1 may receive second indication information from the UE, and the second indication information may be used to indicate that the UE has an association relationship with the first cell; and, the IAB host node 1 determines the cell based on the second indication information.
  • the UE may generate second indication information and send the second indication information to the IAB host node 1, such as sending the second indication information to the IAB host node through an RRC message.
  • the IAB host node 1 can configure one or more of the following rules according to the association relationship between the UE and the first cell: the UE has an association relationship with the first cell, and the UE does not perform cell switching; the UE has an association relationship with the first cell. If the UE has an association relationship with the first cell, but the signal strength of the first cell is less than or equal to the sixth threshold, the UE will not perform cell switching. Cell switching.
  • the specific implementation process in which the UE can generate the second indication information and send the second indication information to the IAB host node 1 may include but is not limited to the following: the first identifier broadcast by the IAB host node 1; the UE receiving the second indication information from the IAB host node 1
  • the first identifier can be related to the IAB node 1 and is an identifier identifiable (or readable) by the user; the UE displays the first identifier, such as displaying the first identifier through a human-computer interaction interface; the user displays the first identifier according to the first
  • the embodiment of this application takes the user's choice to access the first cell as an example.
  • the UE receives an operation instruction from the user to choose to access the first cell, and according to the operation instruction, it can determine whether the UE is connected to the first cell.
  • the first cell is associated; further, in response to the operation instruction, the UE establishes a connection with the IAB host node 1 through the IAB node 1, generates second indication information, and sends the second indication information to the IAB host node 1.
  • the first identifier please refer to the relevant content of S501 and will not be repeated here.
  • Figure 6A takes IAB node 1 as an IAB node installed in bus No. 509, and the first identifier is the IAB cell of bus No. 509.
  • the UE displays available cells, and the display area of the available cells includes the first identifier of the first cell.
  • the UE is located within the coverage of the first cell, and the UE displays the first identification in the display area of the available cell.
  • the UE may actively search for available cells or search for available cells in response to a user operation instruction to search for available cells, and display the search results in the display area of the user-available cells, where the search results include the first identifier.
  • the user can click (or touch) the IAB cell option on the No. 509 bus to choose to access the first cell.
  • the user can choose to access the first cell; accordingly, the UE responds to the user's operation Access the first cell, and determine that the UE has an association relationship with the first cell.
  • the user can also choose not to access the first cell, for example, the user does not take the No. 509 bus, etc.
  • the UE can cancel the association relationship with the first cell, and send third indication information to the IAB host node 1, where the third indication information is used to cancel the association relationship between the UE and the first cell. connection relation.
  • the IAB host node 1 releases the association relationship between the UE and the first cell.
  • the UE may cancel the association with the first cell based on the human-computer interaction interface, as shown in Figure 6B.
  • the UE displays whether to disconnect from the IAB cell of bus No. 509. If the user clicks (or touches) the option, and if the user gets off at the station, the UE disconnects from the first cell. Connect and cancel the association with the first cell.
  • the UE may receive indication information from the IAB host node 1 about the failure of the IAB node 1, and disconnect the connection with the first cell according to the indication information, and cancel the association with the first cell. For another example, if the signal strength of the first cell does not meet the communication requirements of the UE, the UE may disconnect from the first cell and terminate the association with the first cell. For another example, the UE may disconnect the connection with the first cell and cancel the association relationship with the first cell according to the positional relationship between the UE and the IAB node 1 . For example, if the distance between the UE and the IAB node 1 is greater than the set threshold, the UE releases the association relationship with the first cell. It should be understood that the UE can also cancel the association relationship with the first cell through other equivalent methods, which is not limited in this embodiment of the present application.
  • the UE displays the first identifier, determines that the UE has an association relationship with the first cell according to the operation instruction of the user selecting to access the first cell, and sends the second indication information to the IAB host node 1 .
  • the UE may determine that the UE has an association relationship with the first cell based on the first identification and status information, and send the second indication information to the IAB host node 1 .
  • the status information includes the location information of the UE, or the location relationship between the UE and the IAB node 1, or the location information of the UE and the location relationship between the UE and the IAB node 1.
  • the UE may determine that the UE has an association relationship with the first cell. For another example, if the location of the UE coincides with the location of the IAB node 1 corresponding to the first identifier within a set time period, the UE may also determine that the UE has an association relationship with the first cell. It should be understood that the embodiment of the present application is not limited to the specific implementation process of the UE determining that the UE has an association relationship with the first cell based on the first identification and status information.
  • the IAB host node 1 determines the cell switching rules.
  • the IAB host node 1 may determine the cell reselection rule.
  • the cell reselection rules may include, for example, one or more of the following rules:
  • Cell reselection rule 1 UE does not perform cell reselection.
  • the UE does not perform cell reselection, which means that no matter whether there are other cells whose signal strength is higher than the signal strength of the first cell, the UE does not perform cell reselection. This allows the UE to communicate with the IAB node. 1. During the synchronous movement, other cells are not accessed, thereby avoiding the process of the UE accessing other cells and then switching to the first cell.
  • Cell reselection rule 2 the signal strength of the first cell is greater than or equal to the third threshold, and the UE does not perform cell reselection.
  • the signal strength of the first cell is greater than or equal to the third threshold and can meet the communication requirements of the UE. Even if the signal strength of other cells is higher than the signal strength of the first cell, the UE will not access other cells. cell, this can reduce cell switching during the synchronous movement of the UE and IAB node 1, thereby reducing the delay caused by multiple cell switching and improving communication stability and user experience.
  • Cell reselection rule 3 the signal strength of the first cell is less than or equal to the fourth threshold, and the UE performs cell reselection. In cell reselection rule 3, if the signal strength of the first cell is less than or equal to the fourth threshold and cannot meet the UE's communication requirements, the UE can perform cell reselection and enter other cells to meet the UE's communication requirements.
  • Cell reselection rule 4 the first cell has an association relationship with the UE, and the UE does not perform cell reselection.
  • the first cell has an association relationship with the UE, regardless of whether there are other cells with higher signal strength than the first cell. signal strength, the UE does not perform cell reselection. This allows the UE to maintain the connection relationship between the IAB node 1 corresponding to its associated cell during the synchronous movement of the UE and the IAB node 1, thus preventing the UE from accessing other cells. Then switch to the first cell.
  • Cell reselection rule 5 the first cell has an association relationship with the UE, and the signal strength of the first cell is greater than or equal to the seventh threshold, the UE does not perform cell reselection.
  • the first cell has an association relationship with the UE, and the signal strength of the first cell is greater than or equal to the seventh threshold, which meets the communication requirements of the UE, even if there are other cells whose signal strengths are higher than the first cell.
  • Signal strength the UE does not perform cell reselection, which can reduce cell switching during the synchronous movement of the UE and IAB node 1, thereby reducing the delay caused by multiple cell switching, and improving communication stability and user experience.
  • Cell reselection rule 6 the first cell has an association relationship with the UE, and the signal strength of the first cell is less than or equal to the eighth threshold, the UE performs cell reselection.
  • the first cell has an association relationship with the UE, but the signal strength of the first cell is less than or equal to the eighth threshold and does not meet the communication requirements of the UE, then the UE can perform cell reselection and access other cells. , to meet the communication requirements of the UE.
  • the UE determines to access the first cell.
  • the UE performs cell reselection it can be understood that the UE determines to access other cells, such as cells other than the first cell.
  • the above-mentioned third threshold, fourth threshold, seventh threshold and eighth threshold may be predefined or configured by the IAB host node 1, which is not limited in the embodiment of the present application.
  • the third threshold may be greater than or equal to the fourth threshold. If the third threshold is equal to the fourth threshold, then the signal strength of the first cell is greater than or equal to the third threshold, the UE does not perform cell reselection, and the signal strength of the first cell is less than the third threshold, the UE performs cell reselection; or, If the signal strength of the first cell is greater than the third threshold, the UE does not perform cell reselection, but if the signal strength of the first cell is less than or equal to the third threshold, the UE performs cell reselection; this is not limited in the embodiments of this application.
  • the seventh threshold may be greater than or equal to the eighth threshold. For the description of the seventh threshold being equal to the eighth threshold, please refer to the related description of the third threshold being equal to the fourth threshold, which
  • the IAB host node 1 can configure cell reselection rules for the UE.
  • IAB host node 1 may configure cell reselection rules for UEs that access the first cell through IAB node 1.
  • the IAB host node 1 may receive the identification information of the first cell from the UE, determine based on the identification information of the first cell that the UE is a terminal device that accesses the first cell through the IAB node 1, and configure the cell for the UE. Reselection rules. It should be understood that the specific implementation manner in which the IAB host node 1 determines that the UE is a terminal device that accesses the first cell through the IAB node 1 is not limited to this.
  • the IAB host node 1 can configure one or more of the following rules for the UE that the IAB node 1 accesses the first cell: the UE does not perform cell reselection; the signal strength of the first cell is greater than or equal to the third threshold, the UE does not Perform cell reselection; or, if the signal strength of the first cell is less than or equal to the fourth threshold, the UE performs cell reselection.
  • the IAB host node 1 may receive second indication information from the AMF corresponding to the UE (hereinafter referred to as AMF 2).
  • the second indication information may be used to indicate that the UE has an association relationship with the first cell; and, the IAB host node Node 1 determines (or configures) cell reselection rules according to the second indication information.
  • AMF 2 may determine second information, which may indicate that the UE has an association relationship with the first cell, and send the second information (or second indication information) to the IAB host node 1, such as to the IAB host node through an N2 message. Send a second message.
  • the IAB host node 1 can configure one or more of the following rules according to the association relationship between the UE and the first cell: the UE has an association relationship with the first cell, and the UE does not perform cell reselection; the UE and the first cell There is an association relationship, and the signal strength of the first cell is greater than or equal to the seventh threshold, the UE does not perform cell reselection; or, the UE has an association relationship with the first cell, but the signal strength of the first cell is less than or equal to the eighth threshold, The UE performs cell reselection.
  • AMF 2 determines the specificity of the second information
  • For the entity implementation process please refer to the foregoing description and will not be repeated here.
  • the IAB host node 1 may receive second indication information from the UE, and the second indication information may be used to indicate that the UE has an association relationship with the first cell; and, the IAB host node 1 determines the cell based on the second indication information. Reselection rules.
  • the UE may generate second indication information and send the second indication information to the IAB host node 1, such as sending the second indication information to the IAB host node through an RRC message.
  • the IAB host node 1 can configure one or more of the following rules according to the association relationship between the UE and the first cell: the UE has an association relationship with the first cell, and the UE does not perform cell reselection; the UE and the first cell There is an association relationship, and the signal strength of the first cell is greater than or equal to the fifth threshold, the UE does not perform cell reselection; or, the UE has an association relationship with the first cell, but the signal strength of the first cell is less than or equal to the sixth threshold, The UE performs cell reselection.
  • the IAB host node 1 can determine the cell switching rule and the cell reselection rule. Please refer to the foregoing description for the specific implementation process, which will not be described again here.
  • the IAB host node 1 may send the first information to the IAB host node 2.
  • the IAB host node 2 is the IAB host node after IAB node 1 switches the IAB host node. For example, the movement of IAB node 1 triggers IAB host node switching, and IAB node 1 switches from IAB host node 1 to IAB host node 2.
  • IAB host node 1 can send the first information to IAB host node 2, such as carrying the first information in Sent to IAB host node 2 in the UE context. After receiving the first information, the IAB host node 2 can control the cell switching of the UE according to the first information.
  • the IAB host node 2 can reconfigure the first information, such as adjusting the threshold, and control the cell switching of the UE according to the reconfigured first information.
  • the IAB host node 2 reconfiguring the first information please refer to the specific implementation process of the IAB host node 1 determining the first information, which will not be described again here.
  • the IAB host node 1 determines the first information. If the first information includes a cell reselection rule, the contents shown in steps S504, S505, and S506 may be performed. If the first information does not include the cell reselection rule, the content shown in step S505 may be performed.
  • the IAB host node 1 sends the first information to the UE; accordingly, the UE receives the first information from the IAB host node 1.
  • the first information includes cell reselection rules, and the IAB host node 1 sends the first information to the UE.
  • the IAB host node 1 can also send cell switching rules to the UE, which is not limited in the embodiments of this application.
  • the first information may also include fourth indication information, the fourth indication information indicating the cell switching rule of the non-relay cell.
  • the cell switching rule of the non-relay cell may be, for example, controlling cell reselection according to the signal strength of the cell.
  • the IAB host node 1 controls the cell switching of the UE according to the first information.
  • the first information includes cell switching rules
  • the IAB host node 1 can control (or determine) the cell switching of the UE according to the cell switching rules.
  • the UE is in a connected state, and the cell currently accessed by the UE is the first cell.
  • the IAB host node 1 controls the UE's cell switching, which can be understood as the IAB host node 1 triggers the UE to perform cell switching or does not trigger the UE to perform cell switching; or it can be understood as the IAB host node 1 initiating (or activating) the UE's cell switching or Cell switching of the UE is not initiated (or not activated); however, the embodiments of the present application are not limited to this.
  • the cell switching rules include cell switching rule 1.
  • the IAB host node 1 can control the UE not to perform cell switching.
  • the cell switching rules include cell switching rule 2 and cell switching rule 3.
  • the IAB host section Point 1 may receive measurement information from the UE, the measurement information including the signal strength of the first cell, and control the cell switching of the UE according to the measurement information and the cell switching rule. For example, if the signal strength of the first cell is greater than or equal to the first threshold, the IAB host node 1 may control the UE not to perform cell switching according to the cell switching rule 2. For another example, if the signal strength of the first cell is less than or equal to the second threshold, the IAB host node 1 can control the UE to perform cell switching according to the cell switching rule 3, such as switching from the first cell to the cell corresponding to the IAB node 2.
  • the cell switching rule includes cell switching rule 4.
  • the IAB host node 1 can determine that the UE has an association relationship with the first cell, and control the UE not to perform cell switching based on the association relationship and the cell switching rule 4.
  • the IAB host node 1 may determine that the UE has an association relationship with the first cell based on the second indication information from the AMF 2 or the UE, but the embodiment of the present application is not limited thereto.
  • the second instruction information please refer to the relevant content of S503, which will not be described again here.
  • the cell switching rules include cell switching rule 5 and cell switching rule 6.
  • the IAB host node 1 can determine that the UE has an association relationship with the first cell; the IAB host node 1 receives measurement information from the UE, and the measurement information includes the first cell. The signal strength of a cell; and, the IAB host node 1 controls the cell switching of the UE according to the association relationship, measurement information and cell switching rules. For example, if the signal strength of the first cell is greater than or equal to the fifth threshold, the IAB host node 1 may control the UE not to perform cell switching based on the association relationship between the UE and the first cell and the cell switching rule 5 .
  • the IAB host node 1 may control the UE to perform cell switching based on the association relationship between the UE and the first cell and the cell switching rule 6 .
  • the IAB host node 1 may determine that the UE has an association relationship with the first cell based on the second indication information from the AMF 2 or the UE, but the embodiment of the present application is not limited thereto.
  • the second instruction information please refer to the relevant content of S503, which will not be described again here.
  • S506 The UE controls cell reselection according to the first information.
  • the UE receives first information including cell reselection rules, and the UE can control (or determine) cell reselection according to the first information.
  • the UE controls cell reselection according to cell reselection rules.
  • the UE controls cell reselection, which can be understood as the UE triggering itself to perform cell reselection or not triggering itself to perform cell reselection; or it can be understood as the UE initiating (or activating) cell reselection or not initiating (or inactivating) cell reselection. selection; however, the embodiments of the present application are not limited to this.
  • the UE may receive first indication information from the IAB host node 1, and the first indication information may be used to indicate the cell type of the first cell.
  • the IAB host node 1 can broadcast the first indication information, such as carrying the first indication information in the system information for broadcast.
  • the UE receives the first indication information from the IAB host node 1 .
  • the UE may determine whether to use the cell reselection rule to control cell reselection based on the first indication information.
  • the cell types include relay cells and non-relay cells. For descriptions of cell types, please refer to the foregoing description and will not be repeated here.
  • the cell type of the first cell is a relay cell, and the UE controls cell reselection according to the cell reselection rules.
  • the cell type of the first cell is a non-relay cell, and the UE controls cell reselection based on signal strength.
  • the cell type of the first cell is a relay cell as an example for description.
  • the cell reselection rules include cell reselection rule 1.
  • the UE may determine not to perform cell reselection, that is, determine to access the first cell.
  • the cell reselection rules include cell reselection rule 2 and cell reselection rule 3.
  • the UE obtains measurement information, which includes the signal strength of the first cell, and controls the cell according to the measurement information and the cell reselection rules. Reselect. For example, if the signal strength of the first cell is greater than or equal to the third threshold, the UE may determine not to perform cell reselection according to cell reselection rule 2, that is, determine to access the first cell. For another example, the signal strength of the first cell is less than or equal to the fourth cell threshold, the UE can determine to perform cell reselection according to cell reselection rule 3, such as determining to access the cell corresponding to IAB node 2.
  • the cell reselection rules include cell reselection rule 4.
  • the UE may determine that the UE has an association relationship with the first cell, and determine not to perform cell reselection based on the association relationship and the cell reselection rule 4, that is, determine access The first district.
  • the UE may display the first identification, and determine that the UE has an association relationship with the first cell according to the user's operation instructions.
  • the UE may determine that the UE has an association relationship with the first cell according to the first identification and status information.
  • step S503 For a specific implementation process in which the UE determines that it is associated with the first cell, reference may be made to the relevant content of step S503, which will not be described again here.
  • the cell reselection rules include cell reselection rule 5 and cell reselection rule 6.
  • the UE can determine that the UE has an association relationship with the first cell; the UE obtains measurement information, and the measurement information includes the signal strength of the first cell; And, the UE controls cell reselection based on the association relationship, measurement information and cell reselection rules. For example, if the signal strength of the first cell is greater than or equal to the seventh threshold, the UE may determine not to perform cell reselection based on the association relationship between the UE and the first cell and the cell reselection rule 5, that is, determine to access the first cell.
  • the UE may control the UE to perform cell reselection based on the association relationship between the UE and the first cell and the cell reselection rule 6, such as determining that the access IAB node 2 corresponds to community.
  • the specific implementation process for the UE to determine that it is associated with the first cell can refer to the relevant content of step S503, which will not be described again here.
  • the IAB host node 1 when determining whether the UE performs cell switching, adds a judgment condition, which can reduce the number of switching times of the terminal device.
  • the first information is information related to the UE's access to the cell. In this way, the IAB host node 1 can accurately control the cell switching of the terminal device according to the first information, so that the terminal device can perform cell switching at an appropriate time.
  • the IAB host node 1 no longer frequently triggers the UE to perform cell switching only based on the signal strength of the cell, even if there are other cells whose signal strengths are higher than the signal strength of the first cell.
  • the IAB host node 1 also needs to consider the first information, such as whether the UE is associated with the currently accessed cell, to control the cell handover of the UE, thereby reducing the number of handovers of the terminal equipment and reducing the delay caused by multiple cell handovers. , and improve the stability and user experience of terminal device communication.
  • Figure 7 is another schematic flowchart of a communication method provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • the IAB host node 1 configures the first information for the UE according to the UE accessing the first cell through the IAB node 1.
  • the method may include the following content.
  • IAB node 1 establishes a connection with IAB host node 1.
  • S702 The UE establishes a connection with the IAB host node 1 through the IAB node 1.
  • step S701 and step S702 For the specific implementation processes of step S701 and step S702, please refer to S501 and S502 respectively.
  • the UE accesses the first cell, that is, accesses the 5GC through the IAB host node 1.
  • the UE sends the identification information of the first cell to the IAB host node 1; accordingly, the IAB host node 1 can receive the identification information of the first cell.
  • the UE may send the identification information of the first cell to the IAB host node after the UE establishes a connection with the IAB host node 1; it may also send the first cell identification information to the IAB host node during the process of the UE establishing a connection with the IAB host node 1. identification information, which is not limited in the embodiments of this application.
  • the IAB host node 1 determines that the UE is a UE that accesses the first cell through the IAB node 1 based on the identification information of the first cell.
  • the IAB host node 1 can determine that the UE is a terminal device that accesses the first cell through the IAB node 1 based on the identification information of the first cell, and then configure the first information for the UE; or, it can also determine based on the identification information of the first cell.
  • the first information is configured for the UE, which is not limited in the embodiment of the present application.
  • IAB host node 1 determines the first information.
  • the first information includes cell switching rules, or includes cell reselection rules, or includes cell switching rules and cell reselection rules.
  • the IAB host node 1 can configure one or more of the following rules for the UE that the IAB node 1 accesses the first cell: the UE does not perform cell switching; the signal strength of the first cell is greater than or equal to the first threshold, and the UE does not perform cell switching. Cell switching; or, the signal strength of the first cell is less than or equal to the second threshold, and the UE performs cell switching.
  • the IAB host node 1 may configure one or more of the following rules for the UE of the IAB node 1 that accesses the first cell: the UE does not perform cell reselection; the signal strength of the first cell is greater than or equal to the third threshold. , the UE does not perform cell reselection; or, the signal strength of the first cell is less than or equal to the fourth threshold, and the UE performs cell reselection.
  • S705 For the specific implementation method of S705, please refer to the relevant content of S503 and will not be repeated here.
  • FIG. 7 takes as an example that the first information at least includes cell switching rules.
  • the first information may also include fourth indication information, the fourth indication information indicating the cell switching rule of the non-relay cell.
  • the cell switching rule of the non-relay cell may be to control cell reselection according to the signal strength of the cell.
  • the IAB host node 1 sends the first information to the UE; accordingly, the UE receives the first information.
  • the first information includes cell reselection rules
  • the IAB host node 1 may send the first information to the UE.
  • the first information may also include fourth indication information.
  • Figure 7 takes the IAB host node 1 as an example to send cell reselection rules to the UE.
  • S707, S708 and S709 are the contents executed by the UE in the connected state.
  • S710, S711 and S712 are contents executed by the UE in the idle state.
  • S707, S708, S710, S711 and S712 are optional steps.
  • S707 The UE obtains measurement information.
  • the measurement information includes the signal strength of the first cell.
  • the UE may periodically or aperiodicly measure the signal strength of the first cell to obtain the measurement information.
  • the UE sends measurement information to the IAB host node 1; accordingly, the IAB host node 1 receives the measurement information.
  • the IAB host node 1 controls the cell switching of the UE according to the cell switching rules.
  • the IAB host node 1 can determine that the UE will not perform cell switching based on the cell switching rules; or, the IAB host node 1 can determine not to perform cell switching or perform cell switching based on the cell switching rules and measurement information.
  • the specific implementation process please refer to S505. The contents will not be repeated here.
  • IAB host node 1 broadcasts the first indication information; accordingly, the UE receives the first indication information.
  • the first indication information is used to indicate that the cell type of the first cell is a relay cell.
  • S711 The UE determines to use the cell reselection rule to control cell reselection according to the first indication information.
  • the UE may determine to use cell reselection rules to control cell reselection based on the first indication information, or the UE may also control cell reselection based on the first indication information and the cell reselection rules.
  • S712 The UE controls the cell switching of the UE according to the cell reselection rules.
  • the UE may determine not to perform cell reselection based on the cell reselection rules; or the UE may determine not to perform cell reselection or perform cell reselection based on the cell reselection rules and measurement information.
  • the specific implementation process please refer to S506. The content will not be repeated here.
  • FIG 8 is another schematic flowchart of a communication method provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • the IAB host node 1 determines the first information for the UE based on the second indication information from the AMF 2.
  • S803 The UE sends access information to the AMF corresponding to the UE (that is, AMF 2) through IAB host node 1; accordingly, AMF 2 can receive the access information.
  • the access information includes the identification information of the first cell and/or the identification information of the IAB node 1 .
  • this embodiment is described by taking the access information including the identification information of the first cell as an example.
  • AMF 2 obtains the third information from UDM.
  • the third information is, for example, the subscription information of the UE.
  • the third information includes identification information of one or more cells that are associated with the UE, and one or more of the cells includes the first cell.
  • AMF 2 determines that there is an association relationship between the UE and the first cell based on the access information and the third information.
  • AMF 2 sends the second indication information to the IAB host node 1; accordingly, the IAB host node 1 receives the second indication information.
  • the second indication information indicates that the UE has an association relationship with the first cell.
  • the IAB host node 1 determines the first information based on the second indication information.
  • the first information includes cell switching rules, or includes cell reselection rules, or includes cell switching rules and cell reselection rules.
  • the IAB host node 1 may configure one or more of the following rules according to the second indication information: the UE has an association relationship with the first cell, and the UE does not perform cell switching; the UE has an association relationship with the first cell, and the first cell If the signal strength of the cell is greater than or equal to the fifth threshold, the UE does not perform cell switching; or, the UE is associated with the first cell, but the signal strength of the first cell is less than or equal to the sixth threshold, and the UE performs cell switching.
  • the IAB host node 1 may configure one or more of the following rules according to the second indication information: the UE has an association relationship with the first cell, and the UE does not perform cell reselection; the UE has an association relationship with the first cell, and If the signal strength of the first cell is greater than or equal to the seventh threshold, the UE does not perform cell reselection; or, the UE has an association relationship with the first cell, but the signal strength of the first cell is less than or equal to the eighth threshold, the UE performs cell reselection.
  • Figure 8 takes the example that the first information includes cell switching rules and cell reselection rules.
  • IAB node 1 triggers the switching of the IAB host node, that is, the contents of S808 are executed.
  • IAB node 1 carries the UE and switches from IAB host node 1 to IAB host node 2.
  • IAB host node 1 sends the first information to IAB host node 2.
  • IAB host node 2 receives the first information.
  • IAB host node 1 can send the first information to IAB host node 2 after the IAB host node switch is completed, or IAB host node 1 can send the first information to IAB host node 2 during the IAB host node switch process, such as The first information is carried in the UE context and sent to the IAB host node 2.
  • the IAB host node 2 may reconfigure the first information, or may not reconfigure the first information. In this embodiment, the IAB host node 2 does not reconfigure the first information. For example.
  • Figure 9 is another schematic flowchart of a communication method provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • the IAB host node 1 determines the first information based on the second indication information from the UE.
  • AMF 1 determines the first identity of the first cell.
  • the AMF 1 is the AMF corresponding to IAB node 1.
  • AMF 1 can receive the identification information of IAB node 1 from the IAB node 1 corresponding to the first cell, and configure the first identification for the first cell according to the identification information of the IAB node 1; or, AMF 1 can receive the identification information from UDM or The first logo of AF.
  • S903 please refer to the relevant content of S501 and will not be repeated here.
  • S904 AMF 1 sends the first identifier to IAB host node 1; accordingly, IAB host node 1 receives the first identifier.
  • S904 is an optional step.
  • IAB host node 1 determines the first identifier.
  • the IAB host node 1 may configure a first identity for the cell corresponding to the IAB node 1 (ie, the first cell) according to the identity information of the IAB node 1 .
  • IAB host node 1 may receive the first identity from AMF 1.
  • S905 please refer to the relevant content of S501 and will not be repeated here.
  • IAB host node 1 sends the first identifier.
  • the UE receives the first identification.
  • IAB host node 1 broadcasts the first identifier.
  • S907 The UE displays the first identifier, as shown in Figure 6A.
  • S908 The UE obtains the user's operation instructions.
  • the operation instructions are used to enable the UE to access the first cell.
  • S909 The UE determines that the UE has an association relationship with the first cell according to the user's operation instruction.
  • the UE sends the second indication information to the IAB host node 1; accordingly, the IAB host node 1 receives the second indication information.
  • the second indication information indicates that the UE has an association relationship with the first cell.
  • the IAB host node 1 determines the first information based on the second indication information.
  • the IAB host node 1 can configure one or more of the following rules according to the association relationship between the UE and the first cell: the UE has an association relationship with the first cell, and the UE does not perform cell switching; the UE has an association relationship with the first cell. If the UE has an association relationship with the first cell, but the signal strength of the first cell is less than or equal to the sixth threshold, the UE will not perform cell switching. Cell switching.
  • the UE may cancel the association with the first cell based on the human-computer interaction interface, as shown in Figure 6B.
  • the UE may receive indication information from the IAB host node 1 about the failure of the IAB node 1, and disconnect the connection with the first cell according to the indication information, and cancel the association with the first cell.
  • the UE may disconnect from the first cell and terminate the association with the first cell.
  • the UE may disconnect the connection with the first cell and cancel the association relationship with the first cell according to the positional relationship between the UE and the IAB node 1 .
  • the UE releases the association relationship with the first cell. It should be understood that the UE can also cancel the association relationship with the first cell through other equivalent methods, which is not limited in this embodiment of the present application.
  • S918 The UE sends the third indication information to the IAB host node 1; accordingly, the IAB host node 1 receives the third indication information.
  • S918 is an optional step.
  • the third indication information is used to instruct to release the association between the UE and the first cell.
  • the IAB host node 1 releases the association between the UE and the first cell according to the third indication information. This S919 is an optional step.
  • the host wireless access node, terminal equipment, and access and mobility The method provided by the embodiment of this application is introduced from the perspective of interaction between management function network elements.
  • the host wireless access node, terminal device, and access and mobility management functional network element may include hardware structures and/or software modules. In the form of hardware structures, software modules, Or in the form of hardware structure plus software modules to realize the above functions.
  • FIG. 10 shows a schematic structural diagram of a communication device 1000.
  • the communication device 1000 can correspondingly implement the functions or steps implemented by the host wireless access node, the terminal device, or the access and mobility management function network element in each of the above method embodiments.
  • the communication device may include a processing unit 1010 and a transceiver unit 1020.
  • the communication device 1000 may further include a storage unit (not shown in FIG. 10 ), which may be used to store instructions (codes or programs) and/or data.
  • the processing unit 1010 and the transceiver unit 1020 can be coupled with the storage unit.
  • the processing unit 1010 can read the instructions (code or program) and/or data in the storage unit to implement the corresponding method.
  • Each of the above units can be set up independently or partially or fully integrated.
  • the transceiver unit 1020 may include a sending unit and a receiving unit.
  • the communication device 1000 can implement the functions or steps implemented by the host wireless access node in each of the above method embodiments.
  • the processing unit 1010 may be used to determine the first information, which is information related to the terminal device accessing a cell, wherein the cell currently accessed by the terminal device is the first cell corresponding to the relay wireless access node.
  • the relay wireless access node is a child node of the host wireless access node; and controlling cell switching of the terminal device according to the first information.
  • the first information includes cell switching rules
  • the cell switching rules may include one or more of the following rules:
  • the signal strength of the first cell is greater than or equal to the first threshold, and the terminal device does not perform cell switching;
  • the signal strength of the first cell is less than or equal to the second threshold, and the terminal device performs cell switching;
  • the first cell has an associated relationship with the terminal device, and the terminal device does not perform cell switching.
  • the transceiver unit 1020 when controlling cell switching of the terminal device according to the first information, may be configured to receive measurement information from the terminal device, where the measurement information includes the third The signal strength of a cell; the processing unit 1010 may be configured to control cell switching of the terminal device according to the cell switching rule and the signal strength of the first cell.
  • the processing unit 1010 when controlling the cell switching of the terminal device according to the first information, may be configured to determine that the terminal device has an association relationship with the first cell; and according to The cell switching rule and the association relationship determine that the terminal device does not perform cell switching.
  • the transceiving unit 1020 is further configured to send the first information to the terminal device.
  • the first information includes cell reselection rules
  • the cell reselection rules include one or more of the following rules:
  • the signal strength of the first cell is greater than or equal to the third threshold, and the terminal device does not perform cell reselection;
  • the signal strength of the first cell is less than or equal to the fourth threshold, and the terminal device performs cell reselection
  • the first cell has an associated relationship with the terminal device, and the terminal device does not perform cell reselection.
  • the transceiver unit 1020 is further configured to send first indication information, wherein the first indication information indicates that the cell type of the first cell is a relay cell.
  • the processing unit 1010 is further configured to determine a first identity of the first cell, where the first identity is used for the terminal device to access the first cell; a transceiver unit 1020 is further used to send the first identification to the terminal device.
  • the transceiver unit 1020 may be configured to receive the first identity from the access and mobility management function network element.
  • the transceiver unit 1020 may be configured to receive second indication information from the access and mobility management function network element or the terminal device, wherein the second The indication information indicates that the terminal device has an association relationship with the first cell; the processing unit 1010 may be configured to determine the first information according to the second indication information.
  • the communication device 1000 can implement the functions or steps implemented by the terminal device in each of the above method embodiments.
  • the transceiver unit 1020 may be configured to receive first information from the host wireless access node, where the first information is information related to a terminal device accessing a cell, wherein the cell currently accessed by the terminal device is a relay wireless access node.
  • the first cell corresponding to the access node, the relay wireless access node is a child node of the host wireless access node.
  • the processing unit 1010 may be configured to control cell reselection of the terminal device according to the first information.
  • the first information includes cell reselection rules
  • the cell reselection rules include one or more of the following rules:
  • the signal strength of the first cell is greater than or equal to the third threshold, and the terminal device does not perform cell reselection;
  • the signal strength of the first cell is less than or equal to the fourth threshold, and the terminal device performs cell reselection
  • the first cell has an associated relationship with the terminal device, and the terminal device does not perform cell reselection.
  • the processing unit 1010 may be used to determine measurement information, where the measurement information includes the signal strength of the first cell. ; and, controlling cell reselection of the terminal device according to the cell reselection rule and the signal strength of the first cell.
  • the processing unit 1010 may be used to determine that the terminal device has an association relationship with the first cell; and, According to the cell reselection rule and the association relationship, it is determined not to perform cell reselection.
  • the transceiver unit 1020 may be configured to receive first indication information from the host wireless access node, wherein the first indication information indicates that the cell type of the first cell is relay. community.
  • the transceiving unit 1020 is further configured to receive a first identity of the first cell from the host wireless access node; the processing unit 1010 is further configured to access according to the first identity. The first cell.
  • the transceiver unit 1020 is further configured to send second indication information to the host wireless access node, where the second indication information indicates that the terminal device has an association relationship with the first cell. .
  • the processing unit 1010 is further configured to determine that the terminal device has an association relationship with the first cell according to the first identification and status information, wherein the status information includes the Location information of the terminal device and/or the location relationship between the terminal device and the relay wireless access node.
  • the communication device 1000 can implement the functions or steps implemented by the access and mobility management function network element in each of the above method embodiments.
  • the processing unit 1010 may be used to determine second information, the second information is used for the terminal device to access the cell; wherein the second information includes a first identification of the first cell and/or indicates that the terminal device is connected to the first cell.
  • a cell has an association relationship, the first cell is a cell currently accessed by the terminal device, the first cell corresponds to a relay wireless access node, and the relay wireless access node is a host wireless access node. child node; collect
  • the sending unit 1020 may be configured to send the second information to the host wireless access node.
  • the transceiver unit 1020 may be configured to receive the first identification from the unified data management function network element or the application function network element.
  • the transceiver unit 1020 may be configured to receive access information from the UE, where the access information includes identification information of the first cell; and, receive access information from the unified
  • the third information of the data management function network element the third information includes identification information of one or more cells that have an association relationship with the UE, and the one or more cells include the first cell;
  • the processing unit 1010 may be configured to perform the processing according to the connection
  • the input information and the third information are used to determine that the UE has an association relationship with the first cell.
  • processing unit 1010 and the transceiver unit 1020 can be obtained directly by referring to the relevant descriptions in the method embodiments shown in Figure 5, Figure 7, Figure 8 or Figure 9, and will not be described again here.
  • FIG 11 shows a communication device 1100 provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • the communication device 1100 may be an IAB host node 1, capable of implementing the host wireless access node function in the method provided by an embodiment of the present application, or the communication device 1100 It may be a terminal device, capable of realizing the functions of the terminal device in the method provided by the embodiments of this application, or the communication device 1100 may be an access and mobility management functional network element, capable of realizing the access and mobility management functions of the method provided by the embodiments of this application.
  • the function of the mobility management function network element; or, the communication device 1100 can also be a device that can support the source host wireless access node to implement the corresponding functions in the method provided by the embodiment of the present application, or can support the terminal device to implement the embodiment of the present application.
  • the communication device 1100 may be a chip system. In the embodiments of this application, the chip system may be composed of chips, or may include chips and other discrete devices.
  • the above-mentioned transceiver unit 1020 may be a transceiver, and the transceiver is integrated in the communication device 1100 to form the communication interface 1110.
  • the communication device 1100 includes at least one processor 1120, which is used to implement or support the communication device 1100 to implement the functions of hosting a wireless access node, a terminal device, or an access and mobility management function network element in the method provided by the embodiments of this application.
  • processor 1120 which is used to implement or support the communication device 1100 to implement the functions of hosting a wireless access node, a terminal device, or an access and mobility management function network element in the method provided by the embodiments of this application.
  • Communication device 1100 may also include at least one memory 1130 for storing program instructions and/or data.
  • Memory 1130 and processor 1120 are coupled.
  • the coupling in the embodiment of this application is an indirect coupling or communication connection between devices, units or modules, which may be in electrical, mechanical or other forms, and is used for information interaction between devices, units or modules.
  • the processor 1120 may cooperate with the memory 1130.
  • the processor 1120 may execute program instructions and/or data stored in the memory 1130, so that the communication device 1100 implements the corresponding method. At least one of the at least one memory may be included in the processor.
  • the communication device 1100 may also include a communication interface 1110 for communicating with other devices through a transmission medium, so that the devices used in the communication device 1100 can communicate with other devices.
  • a communication interface 1110 for communicating with other devices through a transmission medium, so that the devices used in the communication device 1100 can communicate with other devices.
  • the communication device is a host wireless access node
  • the other device is a terminal device or an access and mobility management function network element; or, when the communication device is a terminal device, the other device is a host wireless access node.
  • Processor 1120 may utilize communication interface 1110 to send and receive data.
  • the communication interface 1110 may specifically be a transceiver.
  • the embodiment of the present application does not limit the specific connection medium between the communication interface 1110, the processor 1120, and the memory 1130.
  • the memory 1130, the processor 1120 and the communication interface 1110 are connected through a bus 1100 in Figure 11.
  • the bus 1140 is represented by a thick line in Figure 11.
  • the connection between other components is only schematic. Description, not limitative.
  • the bus can be divided into address bus, data bus, control bus, etc. for For ease of presentation, only one thick line is used in Figure 11, but it does not mean that there is only one bus or one type of bus.
  • the processor 1120 may be a general processor, a digital signal processor, an application specific integrated circuit, a field programmable gate array or other programmable logic device, a discrete gate or transistor logic device, or a discrete hardware component, which can be implemented Or execute the disclosed methods, steps and logical block diagrams in the embodiments of this application.
  • a general-purpose processor may be a microprocessor or any conventional processor, etc. The steps of the methods disclosed in conjunction with the embodiments of the present application can be directly implemented by a hardware processor for execution, or can be executed by a combination of hardware and software modules in the processor.
  • the memory 1130 may be a non-volatile memory, such as a hard disk drive (HDD) or a solid-state drive (SSD), etc., or it may be a volatile memory (volatile memory).
  • volatile memory volatile memory
  • RAM random-access memory
  • Memory is, but is not limited to, any other medium that can be used to carry or store desired program code in the form of instructions or data structures and that can be accessed by a computer.
  • the memory in the embodiment of the present application can also be a circuit or any other device capable of realizing a storage function, used to store program instructions and/or data.
  • FIG. 12 shows another form of the communication device 1100.
  • the communication device 1200 is a host wireless access node.
  • the host wireless access node includes CU and DU.
  • the CU may include a communication interface, a processor, and a memory, as well as a bus connecting the communication interface, the processor, and the memory.
  • the communication interface may be used to communicate with a CU of another host wireless access node or a DU of an IAB node.
  • the DU may also include a communication interface, a processor and a memory, and a bus connecting the communication interface, the processor and the memory, where the communication interface is used to communicate with the MT of the IAB node.
  • FIG 13 shows another form of a communication device.
  • the communication device 1300 is another example of a host wireless access node.
  • the communication device 1300 can be applied in the system shown in Figure 2 or Figure 3, and can be the IAB host node in Figure 2 or Figure 3, performing the functions of the host wireless access node in the above method embodiment.
  • the communication device 1300 may include one or more radio frequency units, such as a remote radio unit (RRU) 1310 and one or more baseband units (BBU) (also called a digital unit, DU). )1320.
  • RRU 1310 can be called a communication module, corresponding to the transceiver unit 1020 in Figure 10.
  • the communication module can also be called a transceiver, a transceiver circuit, or a transceiver, etc., and it can include at least one antenna 1311 and radio frequency unit 1312.
  • the RRU 1310 part is mainly used for transmitting and receiving radio frequency signals and converting radio frequency signals and baseband signals.
  • the BBU 1320 part is mainly used for baseband processing, base station control, etc.
  • the RRU 1310 and the BBU 1320 may be physically installed together or physically separated, that is, a distributed base station.
  • the BBU 1320 is the control center of the base station, which can also be called a processing module. It can correspond to the processing unit 1010 in Figure 10 and is mainly used to complete baseband processing functions, such as channel coding, multiplexing, modulation, spread spectrum, etc.
  • the BBU processing module
  • the BBU can be used to control the base station to execute the operation process of the network device in the above method embodiment, for example, generate the above indication information, etc.
  • the BBU 1320 may be composed of one or more single boards. Multiple single boards may jointly support a single access standard wireless access network (such as an LTE network), or may respectively support different access standard wireless access networks. Wireless access network (such as LTE network, 5G network or other networks).
  • the BBU 1320 also includes a memory 1321 and a processor 1322.
  • the memory 1321 is used to store necessary instructions and data.
  • the processor 1322 is used to control the base station to perform necessary actions, for example, to control the base station to perform the operation process of the host wireless access node in the above method embodiment.
  • the memory 1321 and processor 1322 may serve one or more single boards. In other words, the memory and processor can be set independently on each board. It is also possible for multiple boards to share the same memory and processor. In addition, necessary circuits can also be installed on each board.
  • Embodiments of the present application also provide a communication system.
  • the communication system includes at least one of a host wireless access node, a terminal device, or an access and mobility management functional network element.
  • An embodiment of the present application also provides a computer-readable storage medium, which includes instructions that, when run on a computer, cause the computer to execute the methods in each of the above embodiments.
  • An embodiment of the present application also provides a computer program product, which includes instructions that, when run on a computer, cause the computer to execute the methods in each of the above embodiments.
  • Embodiments of the present application provide a chip system.
  • the chip system includes a processor and may also include a memory, which is used to implement the functions of a host wireless access node, a terminal device, or an access and mobility management function network element in the foregoing method.
  • the chip system can be composed of chips or include chips and other discrete devices.
  • the size of the sequence numbers of the above-mentioned processes does not mean the order of execution.
  • the execution order of each process should be determined by its functions and internal logic, and should not be used in the embodiments of the present application.
  • the implementation process constitutes any limitation.
  • the disclosed systems, devices and methods can be implemented in other ways.
  • the device embodiments described above are only illustrative.
  • the division of the units is only a logical function division. In actual implementation, there may be other division methods.
  • multiple units or components may be combined or can be integrated into another system, or some features can be ignored, or not implemented.
  • the coupling or direct coupling or communication connection between each other shown or discussed may be through some interfaces, and the indirect coupling or communication connection of the devices or units may be in electrical, mechanical or other forms.
  • the units described as separate components may or may not be physically separated, and the components shown as units may or may not be physical units, that is, they may be located in one place, or they may be distributed to multiple network units. Some or all of the units can be selected according to actual needs to achieve the purpose of the solution of this embodiment.
  • each functional unit in each embodiment of the present application can be integrated into one processing unit, each unit can exist physically alone, or two or more units can be integrated into one unit.
  • the functions are implemented in the form of software functional units and sold or used as independent products, they can be stored in a computer-readable storage medium.
  • the technical solution of the present application is essentially or the part that contributes to the existing technology or the part of the technical solution can be embodied in the form of a software product.
  • the computer software product is stored in a storage medium, including Several instructions are used to cause a computer device (which may be a personal computer, a server, or a network device, etc.) to execute all or part of the steps of the methods described in various embodiments of this application.
  • the aforementioned storage media include: U disk, mobile hard disk, read-only memory (ROM), random access memory (RAM), magnetic disk or optical disk and other media that can store program code. .

Abstract

A communication method and apparatus. The method comprises: a donor wireless access node determines first information, the first information being information related to a cell that a terminal device accesses, a cell that the terminal device currently accesses being a first cell corresponding to a relay wireless access node, and the relay wireless access node being a child node of the donor wireless access node; and the donor wireless access node controls cell handover of the terminal device according to the first information. According to the present application, the donor wireless access node controls the cell handover of the terminal device according to the information related to the cell that the terminal device accesses, so that the number of cell handovers of the terminal device triggered along with the synchronous movement of the terminal device and the relay wireless access node can be reduced, thereby reducing the time delay generated by multiple cell handovers, and improving the communication stability of the terminal device.

Description

一种通信方法及装置A communication method and device
相关申请的交叉引用Cross-references to related applications
本申请要求在2022年04月20日提交中国国家知识产权局、申请号为202210417145.6、申请名称为“一种通信方法及装置”的中国专利申请的优先权,其全部内容通过引用结合在本申请中。This application claims priority to the Chinese patent application submitted to the State Intellectual Property Office of China on April 20, 2022, with application number 202210417145.6 and application title "A communication method and device", the entire content of which is incorporated into this application by reference. middle.
技术领域Technical field
本申请涉及通信技术领域,尤其涉及一种通信方法及装置。The present application relates to the field of communication technology, and in particular, to a communication method and device.
背景技术Background technique
第五代移动通信系统(5th-generation,5G)中引入了接入回传一体化(integrated access and backhaul,IAB)网络技术,IAB网络中的接入链路(access link)和回传链路(backhaul link)皆采用无线传输方案,能够提高信号的覆盖范围,降低部署成本。在IAB网络中,IAB宿主(IAB donor)节点通过有线链路连接到核心网,另外在IAB宿主节点和用户设备(user equipment,UE)之间增加了IAB节点(IAB node),从而该UE可以通过该IAB节点连接到IAB宿主节点,进而接入核心网。The fifth generation mobile communication system (5th-generation, 5G) introduces integrated access and backhaul (IAB) network technology. The access link and backhaul link in the IAB network (backhaul link) all adopt wireless transmission solutions, which can improve signal coverage and reduce deployment costs. In the IAB network, the IAB host node is connected to the core network through a wired link. In addition, an IAB node is added between the IAB host node and the user equipment (UE), so that the UE can Connect to the IAB host node through the IAB node, and then access the core network.
目前,IAB宿主节点根据UE上报的测量信息控制UE的小区切换。若测量信息指示其他小区的信号强度高于该UE当前接入的小区的信号强度,则IAB宿主节点可以指示UE进行小区切换。在一些场景中,UE与其接入的IAB节点可以同步移动,例如救护车作为IAB节点,该救护车上的医疗设备作为UE,则UE与IAB节点可以同步移动。在UE与某个IAB节点同步移动的过程中,若有其它IAB节点的信号强度高于该IAB节点的信号强度,则IAB宿主节点会指示UE进行小区切换。但随着UE与该IAB节点继续同步移动,该IAB节点的信号强度可能又会高于其它IAB节点的信号强度,IAB宿主节点可能会再次指示UE切换回该IAB节点。可见,在UE与IAB节点同步移动的过程中,UE可能会进行多次小区切换,该多次小区切换会产生较大的时延,不利于UE通信的稳定性。Currently, the IAB host node controls the cell switching of the UE based on the measurement information reported by the UE. If the measurement information indicates that the signal strength of other cells is higher than the signal strength of the cell currently accessed by the UE, the IAB host node may instruct the UE to perform cell switching. In some scenarios, the UE and the IAB node it accesses can move synchronously. For example, if an ambulance acts as an IAB node and the medical equipment on the ambulance acts as a UE, then the UE and the IAB node can move synchronously. During the synchronous movement of the UE and an IAB node, if the signal strength of other IAB nodes is higher than the signal strength of the IAB node, the IAB host node will instruct the UE to perform cell switching. However, as the UE and the IAB node continue to move synchronously, the signal strength of the IAB node may be higher than the signal strength of other IAB nodes, and the IAB host node may again instruct the UE to switch back to the IAB node. It can be seen that during the process of synchronous movement of the UE and the IAB node, the UE may perform multiple cell switches. These multiple cell switches will cause a large delay and are not conducive to the stability of the UE communication.
发明内容Contents of the invention
本申请实施例提供一种通信方法及装置,用于减少终端设备的小区切换过程,从而减少因多次小区切换所产生的时延,提高终端设备通信的稳定性。Embodiments of the present application provide a communication method and device for reducing the cell switching process of terminal equipment, thereby reducing the delay caused by multiple cell switching and improving the stability of terminal equipment communication.
第一方面,本申请提供一种通信方法,该方法可由宿主无线接入节点执行,或由包括宿主无线接入节点功能的其他设备执行,或由芯片系统或其他功能模块执行,该芯片系统或功能模块能够实现宿主无线接入节点的功能,该芯片系统或功能模块例如设置在宿主无线接入节点中。可选地,该宿主无线接入节点例如为IAB宿主节点。该方法包括:宿主无线接入节点确定第一信息,所述第一信息是与终端设备接入小区相关的信息,其中,所述终端设备当前接入的小区是中继无线接入节点对应的第一小区,所述中继无线接入节点是所述宿主无线接入节点的子节点;所述宿主无线接入节点根据所述第一信息控制所述终端设备的小区切换。 In the first aspect, this application provides a communication method, which can be executed by a host wireless access node, or by other devices including the host wireless access node function, or by a chip system or other functional modules, and the chip system or The functional module can realize the function of the host wireless access node, and the chip system or the functional module is, for example, provided in the host wireless access node. Optionally, the host wireless access node is, for example, an IAB host node. The method includes: a host wireless access node determines first information, where the first information is information related to a terminal device accessing a cell, wherein the cell currently accessed by the terminal device is a cell corresponding to the relay wireless access node. In the first cell, the relay wireless access node is a child node of the host wireless access node; the host wireless access node controls cell switching of the terminal device according to the first information.
在本申请实施例中,宿主无线接入节点需要根据第一信息来控制终端设备的小区切换,相当于宿主无线节点在确定终端设备是否进行小区切换时,增加了判断条件,这样能够减少终端设备的切换次数。例如在中继无线接入节点与终端设备同步移动的过程中,宿主无线接入节点可以不再根据小区的信号强度频繁触发终端设备进行小区切换,即使存在其他的小区的信号强度高于中继无线接入节点对应的小区的信号强度,宿主无线接入节点也需要考虑第一信息确定是否切换,从而能够减少终端设备的切换次数,减少多次切换所产生的时延,提高终端设备通信的稳定性。另外,第一信息是与终端设备接入小区相关的信息,宿主无线节点根据第一信息控制终端设备的小区切换,可以使得控制结果更为准确,从而终端设备能够在适当的时机进行小区切换。In this embodiment of the present application, the host wireless access node needs to control the cell switching of the terminal device based on the first information, which is equivalent to adding a judgment condition when the host wireless access node determines whether the terminal device performs cell switching, which can reduce the number of terminal devices. number of switching times. For example, during the synchronous movement of the relay wireless access node and the terminal device, the host wireless access node can no longer frequently trigger the terminal device to perform cell switching based on the signal strength of the cell, even if there are other cells with higher signal strength than the relay. The signal strength of the cell corresponding to the wireless access node, the host wireless access node also needs to consider the first information to determine whether to switch, thereby reducing the number of switching times of the terminal device, reducing the delay caused by multiple switching, and improving the communication efficiency of the terminal device. stability. In addition, the first information is information related to the terminal device accessing the cell. The host wireless node controls the cell switching of the terminal device according to the first information, which can make the control result more accurate, so that the terminal device can perform cell switching at an appropriate time.
在一种可选的实施方式中,该第一信息包括小区切换规则,该小区切换规则可以包括如下规则中的一种或多种:In an optional implementation, the first information includes cell switching rules, and the cell switching rules may include one or more of the following rules:
所述第一小区的信号强度大于或等于第一阈值,所述终端设备不进行小区切换;The signal strength of the first cell is greater than or equal to the first threshold, and the terminal device does not perform cell switching;
或者,所述第一小区的信号强度小于或等于第二阈值,所述终端设备进行小区切换;Alternatively, the signal strength of the first cell is less than or equal to the second threshold, and the terminal device performs cell switching;
或者,所述第一小区与所述终端设备具有关联关系,所述终端设备不进行小区切换。Alternatively, the first cell has an associated relationship with the terminal device, and the terminal device does not perform cell switching.
通过上述方式,宿主无线接入节点可根据小区切换规则控制终端设备的小区切换,且小区切换规则包括多种规则,实现方式灵活。Through the above method, the host wireless access node can control the cell switching of the terminal device according to the cell switching rules, and the cell switching rules include multiple rules, and the implementation method is flexible.
在一种可选的实施方式中,所述宿主无线接入节点根据所述第一信息控制所述终端设备的小区切换,可以为:所述宿主无线接入节点接收来自所述终端设备的测量信息,所述测量信息包括所述第一小区的信号强度;所述宿主无线接入节点根据所述小区切换规则和所述第一小区的信号强度控制所述终端设备的小区切换。例如,第一小区的信号强度大于或等于第一阈值,宿主无线接入节点根据该小区切换规则可以确定终端设备不进行小区切换,也即是终端设备当前接入的小区的信号强度大于或等于第一阈值,能够满足终端设备的通信要求,即便存在其他的小区的信号强度高于终端设备当前接入的小区的信号强度,宿主无线接入节点也不触发该终端设备进行小区切换,这样,在终端设备与中继无线接入节点同步移动的过程中,中继无线接入节点对应的小区的信号强度大于或等于第一阈值,宿主无线接入节点可以保持终端设备与该中继无线接入节点对应的小区之间的接入关系,使得终端设备不进行小区切换,从而能够减少终端设备不必要的小区切换。又例如,第一小区的信号强度小于或等于第二阈值,宿主无线接入节点根据该小区切换规则可以确定终端设备进行小区切换,也即是终端设备当前接入的小区的信号强度小于或等于第二阈值,不能满足终端设备的通信要求,且存在其他的小区的信号强度高于终端设备当前接入的小区的信号强度,宿主无线接入节点可以触发该终端设备进行小区切换,以满足该终端设备的通信要求。In an optional implementation, the host wireless access node controls the cell switching of the terminal device according to the first information, which may be: the host wireless access node receives measurements from the terminal device. Information, the measurement information includes the signal strength of the first cell; the host wireless access node controls the cell switching of the terminal device according to the cell switching rule and the signal strength of the first cell. For example, if the signal strength of the first cell is greater than or equal to the first threshold, the host wireless access node can determine that the terminal device does not perform cell handover according to the cell switching rule, that is, the signal strength of the cell currently accessed by the terminal device is greater than or equal to The first threshold can meet the communication requirements of the terminal device. Even if the signal strength of other cells is higher than the signal strength of the cell currently accessed by the terminal device, the host wireless access node will not trigger the terminal device to perform cell switching. In this way, During the synchronous movement of the terminal device and the relay wireless access node, if the signal strength of the cell corresponding to the relay wireless access node is greater than or equal to the first threshold, the host wireless access node can keep the terminal device connected to the relay wireless access node. The access relationship between the cells corresponding to the ingress node prevents the terminal equipment from performing cell switching, thereby reducing unnecessary cell switching by the terminal equipment. For another example, if the signal strength of the first cell is less than or equal to the second threshold, the host wireless access node may determine that the terminal device performs cell handover according to the cell switching rule, that is, the signal strength of the cell currently accessed by the terminal device is less than or equal to The second threshold cannot meet the communication requirements of the terminal device, and there are other cells whose signal strength is higher than the signal strength of the cell currently accessed by the terminal device. The host wireless access node can trigger the terminal device to perform cell switching to meet the second threshold. Communication requirements for terminal equipment.
在一种可选的实施方式中,所述宿主无线接入节点根据所述第一信息控制所述终端设备的小区切换,可以为:所述宿主无线接入节点确定所述终端设备与所述第一小区具有关联关系;所述宿主无线接入节点根据所述小区切换规则和所述关联关系,确定所述终端设备不进行小区切换。通过该方式,宿主无线接入节点可以先确定终端设备与其当前接入的小区之间是否存在关联关系,再根据小区切换规则控制终端设备的小区切换。例如,宿主无线接入节点确定终端设备与其当前接入的小区具有关联关系,宿主无线接入节点根据小区切换规则以及该关联关系确定终端设备不进行小区切换,从而能够减少终端设备不必要的小区切换。 In an optional implementation, the host wireless access node controls the cell switching of the terminal device according to the first information, which may be: the host wireless access node determines whether the terminal device is the same as the terminal device. The first cell has an association relationship; the host wireless access node determines that the terminal device does not perform cell switching based on the cell switching rule and the association relationship. In this way, the host wireless access node can first determine whether there is an association relationship between the terminal device and the cell it is currently accessing, and then control the cell switching of the terminal device according to the cell switching rules. For example, the host wireless access node determines that the terminal device has an association relationship with the cell it is currently accessing. The host wireless access node determines that the terminal device does not perform cell switching based on the cell switching rules and the association relationship, thereby reducing unnecessary cell switching for the terminal device. switch.
在一种可选的实施方式中,该方法还可以包括:所述宿主无线接入节点向所述终端设备发送所述第一信息。通过该方式,宿主无线接入节点可以将第一信息发送给终端设备。In an optional implementation, the method may further include: the host wireless access node sending the first information to the terminal device. In this way, the host wireless access node can send the first information to the terminal device.
在一种可选的实施方式中,所述第一信息包括小区重选规则,所述小区重选规则包括如下规则中的一种或多种:In an optional implementation, the first information includes cell reselection rules, and the cell reselection rules include one or more of the following rules:
所述第一小区的信号强度大于或等于第三阈值,所述终端设备不进行小区重选;The signal strength of the first cell is greater than or equal to the third threshold, and the terminal device does not perform cell reselection;
或者,所述第一小区的信号强度小于或等于第四阈值,所述终端设备进行小区重选;Alternatively, the signal strength of the first cell is less than or equal to the fourth threshold, and the terminal device performs cell reselection;
或者,所述第一小区与所述终端设备具有关联关系,所述终端设备不进行小区重选。Alternatively, the first cell has an associated relationship with the terminal device, and the terminal device does not perform cell reselection.
通过上述方式,宿主无线接入节点还可以确定小区重选规则,以及将该小区重选规则发送给终端设备,这样,终端设备能够根据该小区重选规则控制小区重选,且小区重选规则包括多种规则,实现方式灵活。Through the above method, the host wireless access node can also determine the cell reselection rule and send the cell reselection rule to the terminal device. In this way, the terminal device can control the cell reselection according to the cell reselection rule, and the cell reselection rule Contains a variety of rules and flexible implementation methods.
在一种可选的实施方式中,该方法还可以包括:所述宿主无线接入节点发送第一指示信息,其中,所述第一指示信息指示所述第一小区的小区类型为中继小区。通过该方式,宿主无线接入节点可以广播第一指示信息,以指示该第一小区的小区类型是中继小区,这样,终端设备可以根据小区重选规则确定是否进行小区重选,而不是仅根据小区的信号强度确定是否进行小区重选。In an optional implementation, the method may further include: the host wireless access node sending first indication information, wherein the first indication information indicates that the cell type of the first cell is a relay cell. . In this way, the host wireless access node can broadcast the first indication information to indicate that the cell type of the first cell is a relay cell. In this way, the terminal device can determine whether to perform cell reselection according to the cell reselection rules, instead of just Determine whether to perform cell reselection based on the signal strength of the cell.
在一种可选的实施方式中,该方法还可以包括:所述宿主无线接入节点确定所述第一小区的第一标识,其中,所述第一标识用于所述终端设备接入所述第一小区;所述宿主无线接入节点向所述终端设备发送所述第一标识。通过该方式,宿主无线接入节点可以确定第一小区的第一标识,并向终端设备发送该第一标识,以使得终端设备根据该第一标识接入第一小区。该第一标识例如为可读的标识信息,如用户可识别的标识信息,这样终端设备可显示该第一标识,以便用户根据该第一标识确定是否接入第一小区,从而使得终端设备能够接入合适的小区,例如与用户当前所在位置对应的小区。In an optional implementation, the method may further include: the host wireless access node determining a first identity of the first cell, wherein the first identity is used for the terminal device to access the The first cell; the host wireless access node sends the first identifier to the terminal device. In this way, the host wireless access node can determine the first identity of the first cell and send the first identity to the terminal device, so that the terminal device accesses the first cell according to the first identity. The first identification is, for example, readable identification information, such as identification information identifiable by the user. In this way, the terminal device can display the first identification so that the user can determine whether to access the first cell based on the first identification, thereby enabling the terminal device to Access a suitable cell, such as the cell corresponding to the user's current location.
在一种可选的实施方式中,所述宿主无线接入节点确定所述第一小区的第一标识,可以为:所述宿主无线接入节点接收来自接入与移动性管理功能网元的所述第一标识。通过该方式,该第一标识可以来自于接入与移动性管理功能网元。例如,该第一标识可以是接入与移动性管理功能网元预先配置的标识,或者是接入与移动性管理功能网元从统一数据管理功能网元或者应用功能网元中获取的标识。In an optional implementation, the host wireless access node determines the first identity of the first cell, which may be: the host wireless access node receives a message from the access and mobility management function network element. the first identifier. In this way, the first identification may come from the access and mobility management function network element. For example, the first identifier may be a preconfigured identifier of the access and mobility management function network element, or an identifier obtained by the access and mobility management function network element from the unified data management function network element or the application function network element.
在一种可选的实施方式中,所述宿主无线接入节点确定第一信息,可以为:所述宿主无线接入节点接收来自接入与移动性管理功能网元或所述终端设备的第二指示信息,其中,所述第二指示信息指示所述终端设备与所述第一小区具有关联关系;所述宿主无线接入节点根据所述第二指示信息确定所述第一信息。通过该方式,宿主无线接入节点可以根据来自接入与移动性管理功能网元或终端设备的第二指示信息,确定终端设备与第一小区具有关联关系,并根据该关联关系确定第一信息。例如,宿主无线接入节点可根据该关联关系配置小区切换规则,如终端设备与第一小区具有关联关系,终端设备不进行小区切换,以减少随着终端设备与中继无线接入节点的同步移动而触发的终端设备进行小区切换的次数。进一步,宿主无线接入节点还可以根据该关联关系配置小区重选规则,如终端设备与第一小区具有关联关系,终端设备不进行小区重选。In an optional implementation manner, the host wireless access node determines the first information, which may be: the host wireless access node receives a third message from the access and mobility management function network element or the terminal device. Two indication information, wherein the second indication information indicates that the terminal device has an association relationship with the first cell; the host wireless access node determines the first information according to the second indication information. In this way, the host wireless access node can determine that the terminal device has an association relationship with the first cell based on the second indication information from the access and mobility management function network element or the terminal device, and determine the first information based on the association relationship. . For example, the host wireless access node can configure cell switching rules based on the association relationship. If the terminal device has an association relationship with the first cell, the terminal device does not perform cell switching to reduce the synchronization between the terminal device and the relay wireless access node. The number of cell handovers performed by terminal equipment triggered by movement. Furthermore, the host wireless access node can also configure cell reselection rules based on the association relationship. If the terminal device has an association relationship with the first cell, the terminal device does not perform cell reselection.
第二方面,本申请提供一种通信方法,该方法可由终端设备执行,或由包括终端设备功能的其他设备执行,或由芯片系统或其他功能模块执行,该芯片系统或功能模块能够实现终端设备的功能,该芯片系统或功能模块例如设置在终端设备中。该方法包括:终端设 备接收来自宿主无线接入节点的第一信息,所述第一信息是与终端设备接入小区相关的信息,其中,所述终端设备当前接入的小区是中继无线接入节点对应的第一小区,所述中继无线接入节点是所述宿主无线接入节点的子节点;所述终端设备根据所述第一信息控制所述终端设备的小区重选。In the second aspect, this application provides a communication method, which can be executed by a terminal device, or by other devices including terminal device functions, or by a chip system or other functional modules that can implement the terminal device function, the chip system or functional module is, for example, provided in a terminal device. This method includes: terminal device Be prepared to receive first information from the host wireless access node, where the first information is information related to the terminal device accessing a cell, wherein the cell currently accessed by the terminal device is the third cell corresponding to the relay wireless access node. A cell, the relay wireless access node is a child node of the host wireless access node; the terminal device controls cell reselection of the terminal device according to the first information.
在本申请实施例中,终端设备需要根据第一信息来控制小区重选,相当于终端设备在确定接入的小区时,增加了判断条件,这样能够减少终端设备的切换次数。例如,在中继无线接入节点与终端设备同步移动的过程中,终端设备可以不再仅根据小区的信号强度确定需要接入的小区,即使存在其他的小区的信号强度高于中继无线接入节点对应的小区的信号强度,终端设备也需要考虑第一信息再确定接入的小区,从而能够减少终端设备接入其它小区后随着终端设备与中继无线接入节点的同步移动而频繁触发终端设备进行小区切换,以及减少多次切换所产生的时延,提高终端设备通信的稳定性。另外,第一信息是与终端设备接入小区相关的信息,终端设备根据第一信息控制小区重选,可以使得控制结果更为准确,终端设备能够选择合适的小区进行接入。In this embodiment of the present application, the terminal device needs to control cell reselection based on the first information, which is equivalent to adding a judgment condition when the terminal device determines the cell to access, which can reduce the number of handovers of the terminal device. For example, during the synchronous movement of the relay wireless access node and the terminal device, the terminal device can no longer determine the cell to be accessed based only on the signal strength of the cell, even if there are other cells with higher signal strength than the relay wireless access node. The terminal device also needs to consider the first information before determining the cell to access based on the signal strength of the cell corresponding to the ingress node, thereby reducing the frequent synchronous movement of the terminal device and the relay wireless access node after the terminal device accesses other cells. Trigger terminal equipment to perform cell switching, reduce the delay caused by multiple handovers, and improve the stability of terminal equipment communication. In addition, the first information is information related to the terminal device accessing the cell. The terminal device controls cell reselection based on the first information, which can make the control result more accurate and the terminal device can select a suitable cell for access.
在一种可选的实施方式中,所述第一信息包括小区重选规则,所述小区重选规则包括如下规则中的一种或多种:In an optional implementation, the first information includes cell reselection rules, and the cell reselection rules include one or more of the following rules:
所述第一小区的信号强度大于或等于第三阈值,所述终端设备不进行小区重选;The signal strength of the first cell is greater than or equal to the third threshold, and the terminal device does not perform cell reselection;
或者,所述第一小区的信号强度小于或等于第四阈值,所述终端设备进行小区重选;Alternatively, the signal strength of the first cell is less than or equal to the fourth threshold, and the terminal device performs cell reselection;
或者,所述第一小区与所述终端设备具有关联关系,所述终端设备不进行小区重选。Alternatively, the first cell has an associated relationship with the terminal device, and the terminal device does not perform cell reselection.
在一种可选的实施方式中,所述终端设备根据所述第一信息控制所述终端设备的小区重选,可以为:所述终端设备确定测量信息,所述测量信息包括所述第一小区的信号强度;所述终端设备根据所述小区重选规则和所述第一小区的信号强度控制所述终端设备的小区重选。In an optional implementation, the terminal device controls cell reselection of the terminal device according to the first information, which may be: the terminal device determines measurement information, and the measurement information includes the first The signal strength of the cell; the terminal device controls the cell reselection of the terminal device according to the cell reselection rule and the signal strength of the first cell.
在一种可选的实施方式中,所述终端设备根据所述第一信息控制所述终端设备的小区重选,可以为:所述终端设备确定所述终端设备与所述第一小区具有关联关系;所述终端设备根据所述小区重选规则和所述关联关系,确定不进行小区重选。In an optional implementation manner, the terminal device controls cell reselection of the terminal device according to the first information, which may be: the terminal device determines that the terminal device is associated with the first cell. Relationship; the terminal device determines not to perform cell reselection based on the cell reselection rule and the association relationship.
在一种可选的实施方式中,该方法还可以包括:所述终端设备接收来自所述宿主无线接入节点的第一指示信息,其中,所述第一指示信息指示所述第一小区的小区类型为中继小区。In an optional implementation, the method may further include: the terminal device receiving first indication information from the host wireless access node, wherein the first indication information indicates the location of the first cell. The cell type is a relay cell.
在一种可选的实施方式中,该方法还可以包括:所述终端设备接收来自所述宿主无线接入节点的所述第一小区的第一标识;所述终端设备根据所述第一标识接入所述第一小区。In an optional implementation, the method may further include: the terminal device receiving a first identifier of the first cell from the host wireless access node; the terminal device receiving the first identifier according to the first identifier. Access the first cell.
在一种可选的实施方式中,该方法还可以包括:所述终端设备向所述宿主无线接入节点发送第二指示信息,所述第二指示信息指示所述终端设备与所述第一小区具有关联关系。In an optional implementation, the method may further include: the terminal device sending second indication information to the host wireless access node, the second indication information instructing the terminal device to communicate with the first The communities are related.
在一种可选的实施方式中,该方法还可以包括:所述终端设备根据所述第一标识和状态信息,确定所述终端设备与所述第一小区具有关联关系,其中,所述状态信息包括所述终端设备的位置信息和/或所述终端设备与所述中继无线接入节点之间的位置关系。In an optional implementation, the method may further include: the terminal device determining, according to the first identification and status information, that the terminal device has an association relationship with the first cell, wherein the status The information includes location information of the terminal device and/or a location relationship between the terminal device and the relay wireless access node.
关于第二方面或各种实施方式的技术效果,可参考对于第一方面或相应的实施方式的技术效果的介绍。Regarding the technical effects of the second aspect or various embodiments, reference may be made to the introduction of the technical effects of the first aspect or corresponding embodiments.
第三方面,本申请提供一种通信方法,该方法可由接入与移动性管理功能网元执行,或由包括接入与移动性管理功能网元功能的其他设备执行,或由芯片系统或其他功能模块执行,该芯片系统或功能模块能够实现接入与移动性管理功能网元的功能,该芯片系统或 功能模块例如设置在接入与移动性管理功能网元中。可选地,接入与移动性管理功能网元例如为AMF网元。该方法包括:接入与移动性管理功能网元确定第二信息,所述第二信息用于终端设备接入小区;其中,所述第二信息包括第一小区的第一标识或指示所述终端设备与第一小区具有关联关系,所述第一小区是所述终端设备当前接入的小区,所述第一小区对应于中继无线接入节点,所述中继无线接入节点是宿主无线接入节点的子节点;所述接入与移动性管理网元向所述宿主无线接入节点发送所述第二信息。In the third aspect, this application provides a communication method, which can be executed by an access and mobility management function network element, or by other devices including access and mobility management function network element functions, or by a chip system or other Function module execution, the chip system or functional module can realize the functions of access and mobility management functional network elements, the chip system or The functional module is, for example, provided in the access and mobility management functional network element. Optionally, the access and mobility management function network element is, for example, an AMF network element. The method includes: the access and mobility management function network element determines second information, the second information is used for the terminal device to access the cell; wherein the second information includes the first identifier of the first cell or indicates the The terminal device has an association relationship with a first cell, the first cell is a cell that the terminal device currently accesses, the first cell corresponds to a relay wireless access node, and the relay wireless access node is a host A child node of a wireless access node; the access and mobility management network element sends the second information to the host wireless access node.
在一种可选的实施方式中,所述接入与移动性管理功能网元确定第二信息,可以为:所述接入与移动性管理功能网元接收来自统一数据管理功能网元或者应用功能网元的所述第一标识。In an optional implementation manner, the second information determined by the access and mobility management function network element may be: the access and mobility management function network element receives data from the unified data management function network element or application The first identification of the functional network element.
在一种可选的实施方式中,所述接入与移动性管理功能网元确定第二信息,可以为:所述接入与移动性管理功能网元接收来自UE的接入信息,所述接入信息包括所述第一小区的标识信息;所述接入与移动性管理功能网元接收来自统一数据管理功能网元的第三信息,第三信息包括与UE具有关联关系的一个或多个小区的标识信息,所述一个或多个小区包括第一小区;所述接入与移动性管理功能网元根据所述接入信息和所述第三信息,确定所述UE与所述第一小区具有关联关系。In an optional implementation manner, the access and mobility management function network element determines the second information, which may be: the access and mobility management function network element receives access information from the UE, and the The access information includes the identification information of the first cell; the access and mobility management function network element receives third information from the unified data management function network element, and the third information includes one or more information associated with the UE. Identification information of a cell, the one or more cells including the first cell; the access and mobility management function network element determines the relationship between the UE and the third cell based on the access information and the third information. A neighborhood has an associated relationship.
关于第三方面或各种实施方式的技术效果,可参考对于第一方面或相应的实施方式的技术效果的介绍。Regarding the technical effects of the third aspect or various embodiments, reference may be made to the introduction of the technical effects of the first aspect or corresponding embodiments.
第四方面,本申请提供一种通信装置。所述通信装置可以为上述第一方面至第三方面的任一方面所述的宿主无线接入节点。所述通信装置具备上述宿主无线接入节点的功能。所述通信装置例如为宿主无线接入节点,或为包括宿主无线接入节点的较大设备,或为宿主无线接入节点中的功能模块,例如基带装置或芯片系统等。一种可选的实现方式中,所述通信装置包括基带装置和射频装置。另一种可选的实现方式中,所述通信装置包括处理模块(有时也称为处理单元)和收发模块(有时也称为收发单元)。收发模块能够实现发送功能和接收功能,在收发模块实现发送功能时,可称为发送模块(有时也称为发送单元),在收发模块实现接收功能时,可称为接收模块(有时也称为接收单元)。发送模块和接收模块可以是同一个功能模块,该功能模块称为收发模块,该功能模块能实现发送功能和接收功能;或者,发送模块和接收模块可以是不同的功能模块,收发模块是对这些功能模块的统称。可选地,宿主无线接入节点例如为IAB宿主节点。In a fourth aspect, the present application provides a communication device. The communication device may be the host wireless access node described in any one of the above first to third aspects. The communication device has the function of the above-mentioned host wireless access node. The communication device is, for example, a host wireless access node, or a larger device including the host wireless access node, or a functional module in the host wireless access node, such as a baseband device or a chip system. In an optional implementation, the communication device includes a baseband device and a radio frequency device. In another optional implementation, the communication device includes a processing module (sometimes also called a processing unit) and a transceiver module (sometimes also called a transceiver unit). The transceiver module can realize the sending function and the receiving function. When the transceiver module realizes the sending function, it can be called the sending module (sometimes also called the sending unit). When the transceiver module realizes the receiving function, it can be called the receiving module (sometimes also called the sending unit). receiving unit). The sending module and the receiving module can be the same functional module, which is called the sending and receiving module. This functional module can realize the sending function and the receiving function; or the sending module and the receiving module can be different functional modules, and the sending and receiving module is responsible for these functions. The collective name for functional modules. Optionally, the host wireless access node is, for example, an IAB host node.
例如,所述处理模块,可用于确定第一信息,所述第一信息是与终端设备接入小区相关的信息,其中,所述终端设备当前接入的小区是中继无线接入节点对应的第一小区,所述中继无线接入节点是所述宿主无线接入节点的子节点;以及,根据所述第一信息控制所述终端设备的小区切换。例如,所述收发模块(或,发送模块),可用于向终端设备发送所述第一信息。又例如,所述收发模块(或,接收模块),可用于接收来自接入与移动性管理功能网元或所述终端设备的第二指示信息,其中,所述第二指示信息指示所述终端设备与所述第一小区具有关联关系;所述宿主无线接入节点根据所述第二指示信息确定所述第一信息。For example, the processing module may be used to determine the first information, which is information related to the terminal device accessing a cell, wherein the cell currently accessed by the terminal device is corresponding to the relay wireless access node. In the first cell, the relay wireless access node is a child node of the host wireless access node; and, the cell switching of the terminal device is controlled according to the first information. For example, the transceiver module (or sending module) may be used to send the first information to the terminal device. For another example, the transceiver module (or receiving module) may be configured to receive second indication information from the access and mobility management function network element or the terminal device, wherein the second indication information indicates that the terminal The device has an association relationship with the first cell; the host wireless access node determines the first information according to the second indication information.
在一种可选的实施方式中,所述通信装置还包括存储单元(有时也称为存储模块),所述处理单元用于与所述存储单元耦合,并执行所述存储单元中的程序或指令,使能所述通信装置执行上述第一方面至第三方面中的任一方面所述的宿主无线接入节点的功能。In an optional implementation, the communication device further includes a storage unit (sometimes also referred to as a storage module), the processing unit is configured to be coupled with the storage unit and execute the program in the storage unit or Instructions enable the communication device to perform the functions of the host wireless access node described in any one of the above first to third aspects.
第五方面,本申请提供一种通信装置。所述通信装置可以为上述第一方面至第三方面 的任一方面所述的终端设备。所述通信装置具备上述终端设备的功能。所述通信装置例如为终端设备,或为包括终端设备的较大设备,或为终端设备中的功能模块,例如基带装置或芯片系统等。一种可选的实现方式中,所述通信装置包括基带装置和射频装置。另一种可选的实现方式中,所述通信装置包括处理模块(有时也称为处理单元)和收发模块(有时也称为收发单元)。收发模块能够实现发送功能和接收功能,在收发模块实现发送功能时,可称为发送模块(有时也称为发送单元),在收发模块实现接收功能时,可称为接收模块(有时也称为接收单元)。发送模块和接收模块可以是同一个功能模块,该功能模块称为收发模块,该功能模块能实现发送功能和接收功能;或者,发送模块和接收模块可以是不同的功能模块,收发模块是对这些功能模块的统称。In a fifth aspect, the present application provides a communication device. The communication device may be the above-mentioned first to third aspects any aspect of the terminal equipment. The communication device has the function of the above-mentioned terminal device. The communication device is, for example, a terminal device, or a larger device including the terminal device, or a functional module in the terminal device, such as a baseband device or a chip system. In an optional implementation, the communication device includes a baseband device and a radio frequency device. In another optional implementation, the communication device includes a processing module (sometimes also called a processing unit) and a transceiver module (sometimes also called a transceiver unit). The transceiver module can realize the sending function and the receiving function. When the transceiver module realizes the sending function, it can be called the sending module (sometimes also called the sending unit). When the transceiver module realizes the receiving function, it can be called the receiving module (sometimes also called the sending unit). receiving unit). The sending module and the receiving module can be the same functional module, which is called the sending and receiving module. This functional module can realize the sending function and the receiving function; or the sending module and the receiving module can be different functional modules, and the sending and receiving module is responsible for these functions. The collective name for functional modules.
例如,所述收发模块(或,接收模块),可用于接收来自宿主无线接入节点的第一信息,所述第一信息是与终端设备接入小区相关的信息,其中,所述终端设备当前接入的小区是中继无线接入节点的第一小区,所述中继无线接入节点是所述宿主无线接入节点的子节点。例如,所述处理模块,可用于根据所述第一信息控制终端设备的小区重选。又例如,所述收发模块(或,发送模块),可用于向所述宿主无线接入节点发送第二指示信息,所述第二指示信息指示所述终端设备与所述第一小区具有关联关系。For example, the transceiver module (or receiving module) may be used to receive first information from the host wireless access node, where the first information is information related to the terminal device accessing the cell, wherein the terminal device is currently The accessed cell is the first cell of the relay wireless access node, and the relay wireless access node is a child node of the host wireless access node. For example, the processing module may be configured to control cell reselection of the terminal device according to the first information. For another example, the transceiver module (or sending module) may be configured to send second indication information to the host wireless access node, where the second indication information indicates that the terminal device has an association relationship with the first cell. .
在一种可选的实现方式中,所述通信装置还包括存储单元(有时也称为存储模块),所述处理单元用于与所述存储单元耦合,并执行所述存储单元中的程序或指令,使能所述通信装置执行上述第一方面至第三方面中的任一方面所述的终端设备的功能。In an optional implementation, the communication device further includes a storage unit (sometimes also called a storage module), the processing unit is configured to be coupled with the storage unit and execute the program in the storage unit or Instructions enable the communication device to perform the functions of the terminal device described in any one of the above first to third aspects.
第六方面,本申请提供一种通信装置。所述通信装置可以为上述第一方面至第三方面的任一方面所述的接入与移动性管理功能网元。所述通信装置具备上述接入与移动性管理功能网元的功能。所述通信装置例如为接入与移动性管理功能网元,或为包括接入与移动性管理功能网元的较大设备,或为接入与移动性管理功能网元中的功能模块,例如基带装置或芯片系统等。一种可选的实现方式中,所述通信装置包括基带装置和射频装置。另一种可选的实现方式中,所述通信装置包括处理模块(有时也称为处理单元)和收发模块(有时也称为收发单元)。收发模块能够实现发送功能和接收功能,在收发模块实现发送功能时,可称为发送模块(有时也称为发送单元),在收发模块实现接收功能时,可称为接收模块(有时也称为接收单元)。发送模块和接收模块可以是同一个功能模块,该功能模块称为收发模块,该功能模块能实现发送功能和接收功能;或者,发送模块和接收模块可以是不同的功能模块,收发模块是对这些功能模块的统称。可选地,该接入与移动性管理功能网元例如为AMF网元。In a sixth aspect, the present application provides a communication device. The communication device may be the access and mobility management function network element described in any one of the above first to third aspects. The communication device has the functions of the above-mentioned access and mobility management function network element. The communication device is, for example, an access and mobility management functional network element, or a larger device including an access and mobility management functional network element, or a functional module in an access and mobility management functional network element, for example Baseband device or chip system, etc. In an optional implementation, the communication device includes a baseband device and a radio frequency device. In another optional implementation, the communication device includes a processing module (sometimes also called a processing unit) and a transceiver module (sometimes also called a transceiver unit). The transceiver module can realize the sending function and the receiving function. When the transceiver module realizes the sending function, it can be called the sending module (sometimes also called the sending unit). When the transceiver module realizes the receiving function, it can be called the receiving module (sometimes also called the sending unit). receiving unit). The sending module and the receiving module can be the same functional module, which is called the sending and receiving module. This functional module can realize the sending function and the receiving function; or the sending module and the receiving module can be different functional modules, and the sending and receiving module is responsible for these functions. The collective name for functional modules. Optionally, the access and mobility management function network element is, for example, an AMF network element.
例如,所述处理模块,可用于确定第二信息,所述第二信息用于终端设备接入小区;其中,所述第二信息包括第一小区的第一标识和/或指示所述终端设备与第一小区具有关联关系,所述第一小区是所述终端设备当前接入的小区,所述第一小区对应于中继无线接入节点,所述中继无线接入节点是宿主无线接入节点的子节点。例如,所述收发模块(或,发送模块),可用于向所述宿主无线接入节点发送所述第二信息。又例如,所述收发模块(或,接收模块),可用于接收来自统一数据管理功能网元或者应用功能网元的所述第二信息。For example, the processing module may be used to determine second information, the second information is used for the terminal device to access the cell; wherein the second information includes the first identification of the first cell and/or indicates that the terminal device It has an association relationship with a first cell, the first cell is a cell currently accessed by the terminal device, the first cell corresponds to a relay wireless access node, and the relay wireless access node is a host wireless access node. The child node of the entry node. For example, the transceiver module (or sending module) may be used to send the second information to the host wireless access node. For another example, the transceiver module (or receiving module) may be configured to receive the second information from a unified data management function network element or an application function network element.
在一种可选的实现方式中,所述通信装置还包括存储单元(有时也称为存储模块),所述处理单元用于与所述存储单元耦合,并执行所述存储单元中的程序或指令,使能所述通信装置执行上述第一方面至第三方面中的任一方面所述的接入与移动性管理功能网元 的功能。In an optional implementation, the communication device further includes a storage unit (sometimes also called a storage module), the processing unit is configured to be coupled with the storage unit and execute the program in the storage unit or Instructions to enable the communication device to execute the access and mobility management function network element described in any one of the above first to third aspects. function.
第七方面,本申请提供一种通信系统,包括第四方面所述的通信装置,第五方面所述的通信装置,或第六方面所述的通信装置中的至少一个通信装置。In a seventh aspect, the present application provides a communication system, including at least one of the communication device described in the fourth aspect, the communication device described in the fifth aspect, or the communication device described in the sixth aspect.
第八方面,本申请提供一种计算机可读存储介质,所述计算机可读存储介质用于存储计算机程序或指令,当其被运行时,使得上述各方面中宿主无线接入节点、终端设备或接入与移动性管理功能网元所执行的方法被实现。In an eighth aspect, the present application provides a computer-readable storage medium, the computer-readable storage medium is used to store computer programs or instructions, and when executed, the host wireless access node, terminal device or Methods executed by access and mobility management functional network elements are implemented.
第九方面,本申请提供一种包含指令的计算机程序产品,当其在计算机上运行时,使得上述各方面所述的方法被实现。In a ninth aspect, the present application provides a computer program product containing instructions, which, when run on a computer, enables the methods described in the above aspects to be implemented.
第十方面,本申请提供一种芯片系统,包括处理器和接口,所述处理器用于从所述接口调用并运行指令,以使所述芯片系统实现上述各方面的方法。In a tenth aspect, this application provides a chip system, including a processor and an interface. The processor is configured to call and run instructions from the interface, so that the chip system implements the methods of the above aspects.
附图说明Description of the drawings
图1为5G网络的一种架构图;Figure 1 is an architectural diagram of a 5G network;
图2为本申请实施例适用的IAB网络的独立组网场景的示意图;Figure 2 is a schematic diagram of an independent networking scenario of the IAB network applicable to the embodiment of the present application;
图3为本申请实施例适用的IAB网络的非独立组网场景的示意图;Figure 3 is a schematic diagram of the non-independent networking scenario of the IAB network applicable to the embodiment of the present application;
图4为本申请实施例适用的应用场景的一种示意图;Figure 4 is a schematic diagram of an application scenario applicable to the embodiment of the present application;
图5为本申请实施例提供的通信方法的一种流程示意图;Figure 5 is a schematic flow chart of a communication method provided by an embodiment of the present application;
图6A为本申请实施例提供的UE与第一小区建立关联关系的示意图;Figure 6A is a schematic diagram of establishing an association relationship between a UE and a first cell provided by an embodiment of the present application;
图6B为本申请实施例提供的UE与第一小区解除关联关系的示意图;Figure 6B is a schematic diagram of the disassociation relationship between the UE and the first cell provided by the embodiment of the present application;
图7为本申请实施例提供的通信方法的又一种流程示意图;Figure 7 is another schematic flow diagram of a communication method provided by an embodiment of the present application;
图8为本申请实施例提供的通信方法的再一种流程示意图;Figure 8 is a schematic flowchart of yet another communication method provided by an embodiment of the present application;
图9为本申请实施例提供的通信方法的再一种流程示意图;Figure 9 is a schematic flowchart of yet another communication method provided by an embodiment of the present application;
图10为本申请实施例提供的通信装置的一种结构示意图;Figure 10 is a schematic structural diagram of a communication device provided by an embodiment of the present application;
图11为本申请实施例提供的通信装置的又一种结构示意图;Figure 11 is another structural schematic diagram of a communication device provided by an embodiment of the present application;
图12为本申请实施例提供的通信装置的又一种结构示意图;Figure 12 is another structural schematic diagram of a communication device provided by an embodiment of the present application;
图13为本申请实施例提供的通信装置的再一种结构示意图。FIG. 13 is another structural schematic diagram of a communication device provided by an embodiment of the present application.
具体实施方式Detailed ways
在介绍本申请之前,首先对本申请实施例中的部分用语进行简单解释说明,以便于本领域技术人员理解。Before introducing this application, some terms used in the embodiments of this application will first be briefly explained to facilitate understanding by those skilled in the art.
(1)宿主无线接入节点(donor wireless access point),也可以称为宿主节点,宿主基站(donor base station),或接入回传一体化(integrated access and backhaul,IAB)宿主节点等,是指通过该节点可以接入核心网的节点,是通信系统中将终端设备接入到无线网络的设备。宿主无线接入节点一般通过有线链路(例如光纤线缆)连接到核心网。该宿主无线接入节点可负责接收核心网的数据并转发给无线回传设备,或者接收无线回传设备的数据并转发给核心网。宿主无线接入节点一般可以通过有线的方式连接到网络。(1) Host wireless access point (donor wireless access point), which can also be called host node, host base station (donor base station), or integrated access and backhaul (IAB) host node, etc., is It refers to the node through which the core network can be accessed. It is the device in the communication system that connects the terminal device to the wireless network. Host wireless access nodes are typically connected to the core network through wired links (such as fiber optic cables). The host wireless access node may be responsible for receiving data from the core network and forwarding it to the wireless backhaul device, or receiving data from the wireless backhaul device and forwarding it to the core network. The host wireless access node can generally be connected to the network through wired means.
作为一种示例,宿主无线接入节点可以包括无线网络控制器(radio network controller,RNC)、节点B(Node B,NB)、基站控制器(base station controller,BSC)、基站收发台(base transceiver station,BTS)、家庭基站(例如,home evolved NodeB,或home Node B, HNB)、基带单元(base band unit,BBU)等,也可以包括演进的LTE系统(LTE-Advanced,LTE-A)中的演进型基站(NodeB或eNB或e-NodeB,evolutional Node B),或者也可以包括第五代移动通信技术(fifth generation,5G)新无线(new radio,NR)系统中的下一代节点B(next generation node B,gNB)等。As an example, the host wireless access node may include a radio network controller (RNC), a Node B (NB), a base station controller (BSC), a base transceiver station (base transceiver) station, BTS), home base station (e.g., home evolved NodeB, or home Node B, HNB), base band unit (BBU), etc., which may also include evolutionary base stations (NodeB or eNB or e-NodeB, evolutionary Node B) in the evolved LTE system (LTE-Advanced, LTE-A), or It may also include the next generation node B (next generation node B, gNB) in the fifth generation mobile communication technology (fifth generation, 5G) new radio (new radio, NR) system, etc.
作为另一种示例,宿主无线接入节点可以包括集中单元(centralized unit,CU)和分布单元(distributed unit,DU)。其中,CU是承载宿主无线接入节点的无线资源控制(radio resource control,RRC)、业务数据适配协议(service data adaptation protocol,SDAP)和分组数据汇聚协议(packet data convergence protocol,PDCP)的逻辑节点,用于控制一个或多个DU的操作。DU是承载宿主无线接入节点的无线链路控制(radio link control,RLC)、媒体接入控制(media access control,MAC)和物理层的逻辑节点。CU与其控制的DU通过F1接口相连,该F1接口用于传输CU与DU之间无线承载的下层配置信息,以及为每个无线承载建立DU和CU之间的GTP隧道。该F1接口又可以进一步包括控制面接口(F1-C)和用户面接口(F1-U)。CU和核心网之间通过下一代(next generation,NG)接口相连。其中,CU还可以是以用户面(user plane,UP)(如记为CU-UP)和控制面(control plane,CP)(如记为CU-CP)分离的形态存在,即CU由CU-CP和CU-UP组成。一个CU可以包括一个CU-CP和至少一个CU-UP。As another example, the host wireless access node may include a centralized unit (CU) and a distributed unit (DU). Among them, CU is the logic that carries the radio resource control (RRC), service data adaptation protocol (SDAP) and packet data convergence protocol (PDCP) of the host wireless access node. Node, used to control the operation of one or more DUs. DU is a logical node that carries the radio link control (RLC), media access control (MAC) and physical layer of the host wireless access node. The CU is connected to the DU it controls through the F1 interface. The F1 interface is used to transmit the lower-layer configuration information of the wireless bearer between the CU and the DU, and to establish a GTP tunnel between the DU and the CU for each wireless bearer. The F1 interface may further include a control plane interface (F1-C) and a user plane interface (F1-U). The CU and the core network are connected through the next generation (NG) interface. Among them, CU can also exist in the form of separation of user plane (UP) (such as CU-UP) and control plane (CP) (such as CU-CP), that is, CU is composed of CU- Composed of CP and CU-UP. A CU may include one CU-CP and at least one CU-UP.
该宿主无线接入节点的功能可以是由宿主无线接入节点内部的硬件部件实现,例如,所述宿主无线接入节点内部的处理器和/或可编程的芯片。例如,该芯片可以通过专用集成电路(application-specific integrated circuit,ASIC)实现,或可编程逻辑器件(programmable logic device,PLD)实现。上述PLD可以是复杂程序逻辑器件(complex programmable logical device,CPLD),现场可编程门阵列(field-programmable gate array,FPGA),通用阵列逻辑(generic array logic,GAL),片上系统(system on a chip,SOC)中的任一项或其任意组合。The function of the host wireless access node may be implemented by hardware components inside the host wireless access node, for example, a processor and/or a programmable chip inside the host wireless access node. For example, the chip can be implemented by an application-specific integrated circuit (ASIC) or a programmable logic device (PLD). The above-mentioned PLD can be a complex programmable logical device (CPLD), a field-programmable gate array (FPGA), a general array logic (GAL), a system on a chip (system on a chip) , SOC) or any combination thereof.
另外,为了便于理解本申请实施例,下文以宿主无线接入节点为IAB宿主节点为例进行介绍。In addition, in order to facilitate understanding of the embodiments of the present application, the following introduction takes the host wireless access node as an IAB host node as an example.
(2)中继无线接入节点(relay wireless access point),也可以称为中继节点,无线回传设备,或IAB节点等,是指位于宿主无线接入节点与终端设备之间的节点。该中继无线接入节点可负责将来自终端设备的数据转发给宿主无线接入节点并由宿主无线接入节点转发给核心网,或者接收来自宿主无线接入节点的核心网数据并将该数据转发给终端设备。(2) Relay wireless access point (relay wireless access point), which can also be called relay node, wireless backhaul device, or IAB node, etc., refers to the node located between the host wireless access node and the terminal device. The relay wireless access node can be responsible for forwarding data from the terminal device to the host wireless access node and forwarding the host wireless access node to the core network, or receiving core network data from the host wireless access node and transmitting the data. forwarded to the terminal device.
作为一个示例,中继无线接入节点可以包括移动终端(mobile termination,MT)部分和分布式单元(distributed unit,DU)两部分。当中继无线接入节点面向其父节点(也就是中继无线接入节点的上一跳节点)时,可以被看作是终端设备,即作为MT的角色;当中继无线接入节点面向其子节点(也就是中继无线接入节点的下一跳节点,该子节点可能是另一个中继无线接入节点,也可能是终端设备)时,可以被看做是为子节点提供回传服务的网络设备,即作为DU的角色。中继无线接入节点的MT部分可以具有终端设备的部分或全部功能。中继无线接入节点的DU部分可以包含物理层(physical,PHY)/MAC层/RLC层的功能,与子节点进行通信,为子节点提供接入服务。当子节点为另一个中继无线接入节点时,在RLC层之上还可包括回传适配协议(backhaul adaptation protocol,BAP)层。As an example, the relay wireless access node may include a mobile terminal (mobile termination, MT) part and a distributed unit (distributed unit, DU) part. When the relay wireless access node faces its parent node (that is, the previous hop node of the relay wireless access node), it can be regarded as a terminal device, that is, it plays the role of MT; when the relay wireless access node faces its child node (that is, the next hop node of the relay wireless access node, the child node may be another relay wireless access node, or it may be a terminal device), it can be regarded as providing backhaul services for the child node The network device plays the role of DU. The MT part of the relay wireless access node may have some or all of the functions of the terminal device. The DU part of the relay wireless access node can include the functions of the physical layer (PHY)/MAC layer/RLC layer, communicate with the sub-nodes, and provide access services for the sub-nodes. When the child node is another relay wireless access node, a backhaul adaptation protocol (BAP) layer may also be included above the RLC layer.
应理解,当应用在家庭接入场景中时,中继无线接入节点还可以称为用户驻地设备 (customer premises equipment,CPE),中继无线接入节点还可以具有其他名称,本申请并不限定。It should be understood that when applied in home access scenarios, the relay wireless access node can also be called user premises equipment (customer premises equipment, CPE), the relay wireless access node can also have other names, which is not limited by this application.
该中继无线接入节点的功能可以是由中继无线接入节点内部的硬件部件实现,例如,所述中继无线接入节点内部的处理器和/或可编程的芯片。例如,该芯片可以通过ASIC实现,或PLD实现。上述PLD可以是CPLD、FPGA、GAL、SOC中任一项或其任意组合。The function of the relay wireless access node may be implemented by hardware components inside the relay wireless access node, for example, a processor and/or a programmable chip inside the relay wireless access node. For example, the chip can be implemented by ASIC, or PLD. The above-mentioned PLD can be any one of CPLD, FPGA, GAL, SOC or any combination thereof.
另外,为了便于理解本申请实施例,下文以中继无线接入节点为IAB节点为例进行介绍。In addition, in order to facilitate understanding of the embodiments of the present application, the following introduction takes the relay wireless access node as an IAB node as an example.
(3)小区,也称蜂窝小区,是指在蜂窝移动通信系统中,其中的一个无线接入节点或无线接入节点的一部分(扇形天线)所覆盖的区域,在这个区域内终端设备可以通过无线信道可靠地与无线接入节点进行通信。(3) Cell, also called cellular cell, refers to the area covered by one of the wireless access nodes or part of the wireless access nodes (sector antenna) in the cellular mobile communication system. In this area, terminal equipment can pass through Wireless channels communicate reliably with wireless access nodes.
在本申请实施例中,中继无线接入节点对应的小区的小区类型可称为中继小区。该中继小区是指中继无线接入节点所覆盖的区域,在该区域内终端设备并不是直接与宿主无线接入节点进行通信,而是通过中继无线接入节点的转发与宿主无线接入节点进行通信。另外,本申请实施例涉及的非中继小区,即普通小区,是指无线接入节点所覆盖的区域,在该区域内终端设备直接与无线接入节点进行通信,不需要中继无线接入节点进行转发。In this embodiment of the present application, the cell type of the cell corresponding to the relay wireless access node may be called a relay cell. The relay cell refers to the area covered by the relay wireless access node. In this area, the terminal equipment does not directly communicate with the host wireless access node, but communicates with the host wireless access node through the forwarding of the relay wireless access node. Ingress node to communicate. In addition, the non-relay cell involved in the embodiments of this application, that is, the ordinary cell, refers to the area covered by the wireless access node. In this area, the terminal equipment directly communicates with the wireless access node without the need for relay wireless access. node forwards.
(4)终端设备,是一种向用户提供语音和/或数据连通性的设备。本申请涉及的终端设备可以为终端设备或终端,或者所述终端设备内部能够实现该终端设备功能的硬件部件。(4) Terminal equipment is a device that provides voice and/or data connectivity to users. The terminal device involved in this application may be a terminal device or a terminal, or a hardware component inside the terminal device that can implement the functions of the terminal device.
在本申请实施例中,终端设备可以称为用户设备(user equipment,UE)、移动台(mobile station,MS)、移动终端(mobile terminal,MT)等,例如可以包括具有无线连接功能的手持式设备、或连接到无线调制解调器的处理设备。该终端可以经无线接入网(radio access network,RAN)与核心网进行通信,与RAN交换语音和/或数据。一些终端设备的举例为:个人通信业务(personal communication service,PCS)电话、无绳电话、会话发起协议(session initiation protocol,SIP)话机、无线本地环路(wireless local loop,WLL)站、个人数字助理(personal digital assistant,PDA)、条码、射频识别(radio frequency identification,RFID)、传感器、卫星导航系统,例如全球定位系统(global positioning system,GPS)、北斗定位系统,激光扫描器等信息传感设备等设备。In the embodiment of this application, the terminal device may be called a user equipment (UE), a mobile station (MS), a mobile terminal (MT), etc., and may include, for example, a handheld device with a wireless connection function. device, or processing device connected to a wireless modem. The terminal can communicate with the core network via the radio access network (RAN) and exchange voice and/or data with the RAN. Some examples of terminal devices are: personal communication service (PCS) phones, cordless phones, session initiation protocol (SIP) phones, wireless local loop (WLL) stations, personal digital assistants (personal digital assistant, PDA), barcode, radio frequency identification (RFID), sensors, satellite navigation systems, such as global positioning system (global positioning system, GPS), Beidou positioning system, laser scanners and other information sensing equipment and other equipment.
终端设备还可以可穿戴设备。可穿戴设备也可以称为穿戴式智能设备,是应用穿戴式技术对日常穿戴进行智能化设计、开发出可以穿戴的设备的总称,如眼镜、手套、手表、服饰及鞋等。可穿戴设备即直接穿在身上,或是整合到用户的衣服或配件的一种便携式设备。可穿戴设备不仅仅是一种硬件设备,更是通过软件支持以及数据交互、云端交互来实现强大的功能。广义穿戴式智能设备包括功能全、尺寸大、可不依赖智能手机实现完整或者部分的功能,例如:智能手表或智能眼镜等,以及只专注于某一类应用功能,需要和其它设备如智能手机配合使用,如各类进行体征监测的智能手环、智能头盔、智能首饰等。该终端还可以是虚拟现实(virtual reality,VR)设备、增强现实(augmented reality,AR)设备、工业控制(industrial control)中的无线终端、无人驾驶(self driving)中的无线终端、远程手术(remote medical surgery)中的无线终端、智能电网(smart grid)中的无线终端、运输安全(transportation safety)中的无线终端、智慧城市(smart city)中的无线终端、智慧家庭(smart home)中的无线终端、未来演进的公用陆地移动通信网络(public land mobile network,PLMN)中的终端设备、或者车联网(vehicle to everything,V2X)中的车辆设备,客户前置设备(customer premises equipment,CPE)等。终端设备还可以是车载终端设备, 例如位于车辆上(例如放置在车辆内或安装在车辆内)的终端设备,例如救护车上的医疗设备、车载摄像机等。车载终端设备例如也称为车载单元(on-board unit,OBU)。Terminal devices can also be wearable devices. Wearable devices can also be called wearable smart devices. It is a general term for applying wearable technology to intelligently design daily wear and develop wearable devices, such as glasses, gloves, watches, clothing and shoes, etc. A wearable device is a portable device that is worn directly on the body or integrated into the user's clothing or accessories. Wearable devices are not just hardware devices, but also achieve powerful functions through software support, data interaction, and cloud interaction. Broadly defined wearable smart devices include full-featured, large-sized devices that can achieve complete or partial functions without relying on smartphones, such as smart watches or smart glasses, and those that only focus on a certain type of application function and need to cooperate with other devices such as smartphones. Used, such as various smart bracelets, smart helmets, smart jewelry, etc. for physical sign monitoring. The terminal can also be a virtual reality (VR) device, an augmented reality (AR) device, a wireless terminal in industrial control (industrial control), a wireless terminal in self-driving (self driving), or remote surgery Wireless terminals in remote medical surgery, wireless terminals in smart grid, wireless terminals in transportation safety, wireless terminals in smart city, and smart home Wireless terminals, terminal equipment in the future evolved public land mobile network (PLMN), or vehicle equipment in the Internet of Vehicles (vehicle to everything, V2X), customer premises equipment (CPE) )wait. The terminal equipment can also be a vehicle-mounted terminal equipment, For example, terminal equipment located on the vehicle (for example, placed or installed in the vehicle), such as medical equipment on the ambulance, vehicle-mounted cameras, etc. The vehicle-mounted terminal device is also called an on-board unit (OBU), for example.
终端设备的功能可以通过终端设备内部的硬件部件来实现,所述硬件部件可以为所述终端设备内部的处理器和/或可编程的芯片。可选地,该芯片可以通过ASIC实现,或PLD实现。上述PLD可以是CPLD、FPGA、GAL、SOC中任一项或其任意组合。The functions of the terminal device may be implemented by hardware components inside the terminal device, and the hardware components may be processors and/or programmable chips inside the terminal device. Optionally, the chip can be implemented by ASIC, or PLD. The above-mentioned PLD can be any one of CPLD, FPGA, GAL, SOC or any combination thereof.
(5)本申请实施例中“多个”是指两个或两个以上,鉴于此,本申请实施例中也可以将“多个”理解为“至少两个”。“至少一个”,可理解为一个或多个,例如理解为一个、两个或更多个。例如,包括至少一个,是指包括一个、两个或更多个,而且不限制包括的是哪几个,例如,包括A、B和C中的至少一个,那么包括的可以是A、B、C、A和B、A和C、B和C、或A和B和C。“和/或”,描述关联对象的关联关系,表示可以存在三种关系,例如,A和/或B,可以表示:单独存在A,同时存在A和B,单独存在B这三种情况。另外,字符“/”,如无特殊说明,一般表示前后关联对象是一种“或”的关系。本申请实施例中的术语“系统”和“网络”可被互换使用。(5) “Multiple” in the embodiments of this application means two or more. In view of this, “plurality” in the embodiments of this application can also be understood as “at least two”. "At least one" can be understood as one or more, for example, one, two or more. For example, including at least one means including one, two or more, and it does not limit which ones are included. For example, if it includes at least one of A, B and C, then it can include A, B, C, A and B, A and C, B and C, or A and B and C. "And/or" describes the relationship between related objects, indicating that there can be three relationships. For example, A and/or B can mean: A exists alone, A and B exist simultaneously, and B exists alone. In addition, the character "/", unless otherwise specified, generally indicates that the related objects are in an "or" relationship. The terms "system" and "network" in the embodiments of this application may be used interchangeably.
除非有相反的说明,本申请实施例提及“第一”、“第二”等序数词用于对多个对象进行区分,不用于限定多个对象的顺序、时序、优先级或者重要程度。Unless otherwise stated, ordinal numbers such as "first" and "second" mentioned in the embodiments of this application are used to distinguish multiple objects and are not used to limit the order, timing, priority or importance of multiple objects.
前面介绍了本申请涉及的部分术语,接下来介绍本申请实施例适用的通信系统以及应用场景。Some terms involved in this application have been introduced previously. Next, the communication systems and application scenarios applicable to the embodiments of this application will be introduced.
需要说明的是,本申请实施例的技术方案可以应用于各种通信系统,例如长期演进(long term evolution,LTE)系统、LTE频分双工(frequency division duplex,FDD)系统、LTE时分双工(time division duplex,TDD)、第五代(5th generation,5G)移动通信系统或新无线(new radio,NR)系统,或者应用于未来的通信系统或其它类似的通信系统等。本申请实施例以5G通信系统为例进行介绍。It should be noted that the technical solutions of the embodiments of the present application can be applied to various communication systems, such as long term evolution (long term evolution, LTE) systems, LTE frequency division duplex (FDD) systems, and LTE time division duplex systems. (time division duplex, TDD), fifth generation (5th generation, 5G) mobile communication system or new wireless (new radio, NR) system, or applied to future communication systems or other similar communication systems. The embodiments of this application are introduced by taking the 5G communication system as an example.
图1示出了5G通信系统的架构,该通信系统的架构可以包括:(无线)接入网络(图1中的(R)AN)、终端设备和核心网。示例性的,该通信系统的架构中,(无线)接入网络中可以包括接入网网元。其中,有关终端设备的介绍,请参考前述描述。为描述方便,本申请实施例中将终端设备以UE为例进行说明。Figure 1 shows the architecture of a 5G communication system, which may include: (wireless) access network ((R)AN in Figure 1), terminal equipment and core network. For example, in the architecture of the communication system, the (wireless) access network may include access network elements. Among them, for the introduction of terminal equipment, please refer to the previous description. For convenience of description, in the embodiment of this application, the terminal device is described by taking a UE as an example.
本申请实施例中,接入网网元,又可以称为接入网设备,为具有无线收发功能的设备,用于与终端设备进行通信。所述接入网网元包括但不限于基站(基站收发信站点(base transceiver station,BTS),Node B,eNodeB/eNB,或gNodeB/gNB)、收发点(transmission reception point,TRP),第三代合作伙伴计划(3rd generation partnership project,3GPP)后续演进的基站,无线保真(wireless fidelity,Wi-Fi)系统中的接入节点,无线中继节点,无线回传节点等。所述基站可以是:宏基站,微基站,微微基站,小站,中继站等。多个基站可以支持同一种接入技术的网络,也可以支持不同接入技术的网络。基站可以包含一个或多个共站或非共站的传输接收点。所述接入网网元还可以是云无线接入网络(cloud radio access network,CRAN)场景下的无线控制器、集中单元(centralized unit,CU),和/或分布单元(distributed unit,DU)。例如,车到一切(vehicle to everything,V2X)技术中的接入网网元可以为路侧单元(road side unit,RSU)。以下对接入网网元以为基站为例进行说明。基站可以与终端设备进行通信,也可以通过中继站与终端设备进行通信。终端设备可以与不同接入技术中的多个基站进行通信。In the embodiment of this application, the access network element, which may also be called an access network device, is a device with wireless transceiver functions and is used to communicate with terminal devices. The access network elements include but are not limited to base stations (base transceiver station (BTS), Node B, eNodeB/eNB, or gNodeB/gNB), transceiver points (transmission reception point, TRP), third Base stations for the subsequent evolution of the 3rd generation partnership project (3GPP), access nodes in wireless fidelity (Wi-Fi) systems, wireless relay nodes, wireless backhaul nodes, etc. The base station may be: a macro base station, a micro base station, a pico base station, a small station, a relay station, etc. Multiple base stations can support networks with the same access technology or networks with different access technologies. A base station may contain one or more co-located or non-co-located transmission and reception points. The access network element may also be a wireless controller, a centralized unit (CU), and/or a distributed unit (DU) in a cloud radio access network (cloud radio access network, CRAN) scenario. . For example, the access network element in vehicle to everything (V2X) technology can be a road side unit (RSU). The following description takes the access network element as a base station as an example. The base station can communicate with the terminal device or communicate with the terminal device through the relay station. Terminal devices can communicate with multiple base stations in different access technologies.
核心网中的设备包括但不限于用于实现移动管理,数据处理,会话管理,策略和计费 等功能的设备。以5GS为例,所述核心网设备可以包括网络开放功能(network exposure function,NEF)网元、策略控制功能(policy control function,PCF)网元、统一数据管理(unified data management,UDM)、应用功能(application function,AF)网元、接入与移动性管理功能(access and mobility management function,AMF)网元、会话管理功能(session management function,SMF)网元、用户面功能(user plane function,UPF)网元等。Equipment in the core network includes but is not limited to implementing mobility management, data processing, session management, policy and billing equipment with other functions. Taking 5GS as an example, the core network equipment may include network exposure function (NEF) network elements, policy control function (PCF) network elements, unified data management (UDM), application Function (application function, AF) network element, access and mobility management function (AMF) network element, session management function (SMF) network element, user plane function, UPF) network elements, etc.
接入与移动性管理功能网元,主要功能可包括管理用户注册,SMF网元选择,移动性管理,接入鉴权/授权等。例如,在5G通信系统中,接入与移动性管理功能网元可以是AMF网元,如图1所示;在未来通信系统,如6G通信系统中,接入与移动性管理功能网元仍可以是AMF网元,或可能有其它的名称,本申请实施例不做限定。Access and mobility management function network elements, the main functions may include managing user registration, SMF network element selection, mobility management, access authentication/authorization, etc. For example, in the 5G communication system, the access and mobility management function network element can be an AMF network element, as shown in Figure 1; in future communication systems, such as the 6G communication system, the access and mobility management function network element will still be It may be an AMF network element, or it may have other names, which are not limited in the embodiment of this application.
统一数据管理网元,负责用户标识、签约数据、鉴权数据的管理、用户的服务网元注册管理。例如,在5G通信系统中,该统一数据管理网元可以UDM网元,如图1所示;在未来通信,如6G通信系统中,该统一数据管理网元仍可以是UDM网元,或有其它的名称,本申请实施例不做限定。The unified data management network element is responsible for the management of user identification, contract data, authentication data, and user service network element registration management. For example, in a 5G communication system, the unified data management network element can be a UDM network element, as shown in Figure 1; in future communications, such as a 6G communication system, the unified data management network element can still be a UDM network element, or have Other names are not limited in the embodiments of this application.
应用功能网元,在5G通信系统中,该应用功能网元可以是AF网元,表示第三方或运营商的应用功能,是5G网络获取外部应用数据的接口,主要用于传递应用侧对网络侧的需求。应理解的是,在未来通信,如6G通信系统中,该应用功能网元仍可以是AF网元,或有其它的名称,本申请实施例不做限定。Application function network element. In the 5G communication system, the application function network element can be an AF network element, which represents the application function of a third party or operator. It is the interface for the 5G network to obtain external application data, and is mainly used to transmit application side information to the network. side needs. It should be understood that in future communications, such as 6G communication systems, the application function network element can still be an AF network element, or have other names, which are not limited by the embodiments of this application.
如上主要介绍了本申请的各个实施例可能涉及的一些网元,另外图1还涉及其他网元,在此不做过多介绍。The above mainly introduces some network elements that may be involved in various embodiments of the present application. In addition, Figure 1 also involves other network elements, so no further introduction will be given here.
其中,核心网中的各个网元既可以是在专用硬件上实现的网络元件,也可以是在专用硬件上运行的软件实例,或者是在适当平台上虚拟化功能的实例,例如,上述虚拟化平台可以为云平台。以及,该核心网中的各个网元也可以称为功能实体或者设备,例如,用户面功能网元也可以称为用户面功能实体或用户面功能设备,策略控制功能网元也可以称为策略控制功能实体或策略控制功能设备,统一数据管理网元也可以称为统一数据管理实体或统一数据管理设备。Among them, each network element in the core network can be either a network element implemented on dedicated hardware, a software instance running on dedicated hardware, or an instance of a virtualization function on an appropriate platform, for example, the above-mentioned virtualization The platform can be a cloud platform. Moreover, each network element in the core network can also be called a functional entity or device. For example, a user plane functional network element can also be called a user plane functional entity or a user plane functional device, and a policy control functional network element can also be called a policy. Control function entity or policy control function device, unified data management network element may also be called unified data management entity or unified data management device.
图1中Nnef、Namf、Npcf、Nsmf、Nudm、Naf、N1、N2、N3、N4、以及N6为接口序列号。这些接口序列号的含义可参见3GPP标准协议中定义的含义,在此不做限制。In Figure 1, Nnef, Namf, Npcf, Nsmf, Nudm, Naf, N1, N2, N3, N4, and N6 are interface serial numbers. The meaning of these interface serial numbers can be found in the meaning defined in the 3GPP standard protocol, and is not limited here.
应理解,本申请实施例并不限于图1所示通信系统,图1中所示的网元的名称在这里仅作为一种示例说明,并不作为对本申请实施例的方法适用的通信系统架构中包括的网元的限定。不同接入技术的系统中实现核心网功能的设备名称可以不同,本申请实施例并不对此进行限定。It should be understood that the embodiments of the present application are not limited to the communication system shown in Figure 1. The names of the network elements shown in Figure 1 are only used as an example here and are not used as a communication system architecture applicable to the methods of the embodiments of the present application. Limitation of network elements included in . The names of devices that implement core network functions in systems with different access technologies may be different, and the embodiments of this application do not limit this.
需要说明的是,图1所示的通信系统并不构成本申请实施例能够适用的通信系统的限定。图1所示的通信系统架构为5G系统架构,可选地,本申请实施例提供的技术方案除了可应用于5G系统外,还可以应用于第四代移动通信技术(the 4th generation,4G)系统中,例如LTE系统,或者还可以应用于下一代移动通信系统或其他类似的通信系统,具体的不做限制。It should be noted that the communication system shown in Figure 1 does not constitute a limitation of the communication systems to which the embodiments of the present application can be applied. The communication system architecture shown in Figure 1 is a 5G system architecture. Optionally, the technical solutions provided by the embodiments of this application can be applied not only to the 5G system, but also to the fourth generation mobile communication technology (the 4th generation, 4G). systems, such as LTE systems, or can also be applied to next-generation mobile communication systems or other similar communication systems, without specific limitations.
需要说明的是,图1所示的通信系统的架构中不限于仅包含图中所示的网元,还可以包含其它未在图中表示的设备,具体在此处不再一一列举。It should be noted that the architecture of the communication system shown in Figure 1 is not limited to including only the network elements shown in the figure, but may also include other devices not shown in the figure, which will not be listed here.
需要说明的是,本申请实施例并不限定各个网元的分布形式,图1所示的分布形式只是示例性的,本申请实施例不作限定。 It should be noted that the embodiments of the present application do not limit the distribution form of each network element. The distribution form shown in Figure 1 is only exemplary and is not limited by the embodiments of the present application.
为方便说明,本申请实施例后续涉及的网元均以图1中所示的网元为例进行说明,并将XX网元直接简称为XX,例如,将AMF网元简称为AMF,将UDM网元简称为UDM,将AF网元简称为AF等。应理解,本申请实施例中所有网元的名称仅仅作为示例,在未来通信中还可以称为其它名称,或者在未来通信中本申请实施例涉及的网元还可以通过其它具有相同功能的实体或者设备等来替代,本申请实施例对此均不作限定。这里做统一说明,后续不再赘述。For convenience of explanation, the network elements involved in the embodiments of this application will be described by taking the network element shown in Figure 1 as an example, and the XX network element will be directly referred to as XX. For example, the AMF network element will be referred to as AMF, and the UDM network element will be referred to as XX. The network element is abbreviated as UDM, and the AF network element is abbreviated as AF, etc. It should be understood that the names of all network elements in the embodiments of this application are only as examples, and they may also be called other names in future communications, or in future communications, the network elements involved in the embodiments of this application may also be named by other entities with the same functions. Or equipment, etc., which are not limited in the embodiments of the present application. A unified explanation is given here and will not be repeated later.
本申请实施例涉及IAB网络。图2和图3分别示出了IAB网络的独立组网(standalone,SA)场景的示意图和IAB网络的非独立组网(non standalone,NSA)场景的示意图。所述独立组网场景是指IAB节点和终端设备均通过相同通信制式(例如NR制式)的空中接口与网络建立连接。所述非独立组网场景是指IAB节点和终端设备通过两种或更多种通信制式的空中接口与网络建立连接。The embodiment of this application relates to the IAB network. Figures 2 and 3 respectively show a schematic diagram of the standalone networking (SA) scenario of the IAB network and a schematic diagram of the non-standalone networking (NSA) scenario of the IAB network. The independent networking scenario refers to that both the IAB node and the terminal device establish connections with the network through the air interface of the same communication format (for example, NR format). The non-independent networking scenario refers to that the IAB node and the terminal device establish a connection with the network through the air interface of two or more communication standards.
具体的,在图2中,IAB节点的父节点为IAB宿主节点。应理解的是,UE与IAB宿主节点之间可以包括一个或多个IAB节点,图2中以一个IAB节点为例。UE的上行数据经一个或多个IAB节点传输至IAB宿主节点后,再由IAB宿主节点发送至移动网元设备(例如5G核心网(5G core,5GC)中的UPF网元)。UE的下行数据包由IAB宿主节点从移动网关设备处接收到,再通过一个或多个IAB节点发送至UE。Specifically, in Figure 2, the parent node of the IAB node is the IAB host node. It should be understood that one or more IAB nodes may be included between the UE and the IAB host node. In Figure 2, one IAB node is taken as an example. After the UE's uplink data is transmitted to the IAB host node through one or more IAB nodes, the IAB host node then sends it to the mobile network element device (such as the UPF network element in the 5G core network (5G core, 5GC)). The UE's downlink data packet is received by the IAB host node from the mobile gateway device, and then sent to the UE through one or more IAB nodes.
需要说明的是,图2中所示的独立组网场景仅仅是示例性的,在多跳与双连接或多连接相结合的场景中,还有其他更多的可能性,例如图2中所示的IAB宿主节点还可与另一IAB宿主节点下的IAB节点组成双连接为终端设备提供服务。类似的例子还有很多,在此不再一一列举。It should be noted that the independent networking scenario shown in Figure 2 is only exemplary. In the scenario of combining multi-hop with dual connections or multiple connections, there are other possibilities, such as those shown in Figure 2 The IAB host node shown can also form a dual connection with an IAB node under another IAB host node to provide services for terminal devices. There are many similar examples, so I won’t list them all here.
请参考图3,为本申请实施例提供的IAB网络的非独立组网(Non standalone,NSA)场景的示意图。在图3中,IAB节点支持4G和5G网络双连接,即演进的通用陆面无线接入与新空口双连接(E-UTRAN NR dual connectivity,EN-DC),其中LTE的基站eNB为主基站,为IAB节点提供LTE的空口(LTE Uu)连接,并与4G核心网演进型分组核心网(evolved packet core,EPC)建立S1接口进行用户面和控制面传输。IAB宿主节点为辅基站,为IAB节点提供NR的空口(NR Uu)连接,并与核心网EPC建立S1接口进行用户面传输。类似的,UE也支持EN-DC,UE通过LTE Uu接口连接到主基站eNB,通过NR Uu接口连接到辅基站IAB节点,UE的辅基站也可以是IAB宿主节点。Please refer to Figure 3, which is a schematic diagram of the non-standalone (NSA) scenario of the IAB network provided by the embodiment of the present application. In Figure 3, the IAB node supports dual connectivity of 4G and 5G networks, that is, evolved universal terrestrial wireless access and new air interface dual connectivity (E-UTRAN NR dual connectivity, EN-DC), in which the LTE base station eNB is the main base station , providing LTE air interface (LTE Uu) connection for IAB nodes, and establishing an S1 interface with the 4G core network evolved packet core (EPC) for user plane and control plane transmission. The IAB host node is a secondary base station, which provides NR air interface (NR Uu) connection for the IAB node, and establishes an S1 interface with the core network EPC for user plane transmission. Similarly, UE also supports EN-DC. The UE is connected to the main base station eNB through the LTE Uu interface and the secondary base station IAB node through the NR Uu interface. The secondary base station of the UE can also be an IAB host node.
需要说明的是,图3中所示的非独立组网场景也可以称之为IAB的EN-DC组网场景,该组网场景仅仅是非独立组网场景的一种示例。应理解,非独立组网场景中同样可以支持多跳组网,即IAB节点经由至少一个中间IAB节点(或者说通过多跳的无线回传链路)连接到IAB宿主节点(具体可以是IAB宿主节点的DU,即IAB donor DU),图3以一个IAB节点为例。It should be noted that the non-independent networking scenario shown in Figure 3 can also be called the IAB EN-DC networking scenario. This networking scenario is just an example of the non-independent networking scenario. It should be understood that the non-independent networking scenario can also support multi-hop networking, that is, the IAB node is connected to the IAB host node (specifically, the IAB host) via at least one intermediate IAB node (or through a multi-hop wireless backhaul link). The DU of the node, that is, IAB donor DU), Figure 3 takes an IAB node as an example.
需要说明的是,有关IAB宿主节点的介绍请参考前述对宿主无线接入节点的介绍,有关IAB节点的介绍请参考前述对中继无线接入节点的介绍,此处不再赘述。It should be noted that for an introduction to the IAB host node, please refer to the aforementioned introduction to the host wireless access node, and for an introduction to the IAB node, please refer to the aforementioned introduction to the relay wireless access node, which will not be described again here.
另外,图2和图3所涉及的各个接口序列号的含义可参见3GPP标准协议中定义的含义,在此不做限制。In addition, the meaning of each interface serial number involved in Figures 2 and 3 can be found in the meaning defined in the 3GPP standard protocol, and is not limited here.
本申请实施例涉及UE与IAB节点同步(或同时)移动的场景,但本申请实施例并不限定于此。图4示出了本申请适用的一种应用场景。如图4所示,UE通过IAB节点1与IAB宿主节点1建立连接,并通过该IAB宿主节点1接入5GC;之后,UE与IAB节点1 同步移动,随着UE与IAB节点1的同步移动,IAB节点1可以从IAB宿主节点1切换至IAB宿主节点2,即,UE通过IAB宿主节点2接入5GC。The embodiment of the present application relates to a scenario in which the UE and the IAB node move synchronously (or simultaneously), but the embodiment of the present application is not limited thereto. Figure 4 shows an application scenario to which this application is applicable. As shown in Figure 4, the UE establishes a connection with the IAB host node 1 through the IAB node 1, and accesses the 5GC through the IAB host node 1; after that, the UE and the IAB node 1 Synchronous movement. As the UE moves synchronously with the IAB node 1, the IAB node 1 can switch from the IAB host node 1 to the IAB host node 2. That is, the UE accesses the 5GC through the IAB host node 2.
UE与IAB节点1的同步移动不仅可以触发IAB宿主节点的切换还可以触发小区切换。例如,在UE与IAB节点1的同步移动过程中,UE向IAB宿主节点1发送测量信息,若测量信息指示IAB节点2对应的小区的信号强度高于IAB节点1对应的小区的信号强度,则IAB宿主节点1可以指示UE从IAB节点1对应的小区切换至IAB节点2对应的小区。随着UE与IAB节点1继续同步移动,该IAB节点1对应的小区的信号强度可能又会高于IAB节点2对应的小区的信号强度,如UE移出IAB节点2的覆盖范围,则IAB宿主节点1可能会再次指示UE从IAB节点2对应的小区切换回该IAB节点1对应的小区。由此可见,在UE与IAB节点1同步移动的过程中,UE会进行多次小区切换,该多次小区切换会产生较大的时延,不利于UE通信的稳定性。The synchronous movement of UE and IAB node 1 can not only trigger the handover of the IAB host node but also trigger the cell handover. For example, during the synchronous movement of the UE and IAB node 1, the UE sends measurement information to the IAB host node 1. If the measurement information indicates that the signal strength of the cell corresponding to IAB node 2 is higher than the signal strength of the cell corresponding to IAB node 1, then IAB host node 1 may instruct the UE to switch from the cell corresponding to IAB node 1 to the cell corresponding to IAB node 2. As the UE and IAB node 1 continue to move synchronously, the signal strength of the cell corresponding to the IAB node 1 may be higher than the signal strength of the cell corresponding to the IAB node 2. If the UE moves out of the coverage of IAB node 2, the IAB host node 1 may instruct the UE again to switch from the cell corresponding to IAB node 2 back to the cell corresponding to IAB node 1. It can be seen that during the synchronous movement of the UE and the IAB node 1, the UE will perform multiple cell handovers. These multiple cell handovers will produce a large delay and are not conducive to the stability of the UE communication.
鉴于此,本申请实施例提供一种通信方法及装置,包括宿主无线接入节点确定第一信息,以及根据该第一信息控制终端设备的小区切换,意味着宿主无线接入节点在确定终端设备是否进行小区切换时,增加了判断条件,这样能够减少终端设备的切换次数。例如,在中继无线接入节点与终端设备同步移动的过程中,宿主无线接入节点可以不再仅根据小区的信号强度频繁触发终端设备进行小区切换,即使存在其他小区的信号强度高于中继无线接入节点对应的小区的信号强度,宿主无线接入节点也需要考虑第一信息确定是否切换,从而能够减少终端设备的切换次数,以及减少多次切换所产生的时延,能够提高终端设备通信的稳定性。另外,第一信息是与终端设备接入小区相关的信息,宿主无线节点根据第一信息控制终端设备的小区切换,可以使得控制结果更为准确,从而终端设备能够在适当的时机进行小区切换。In view of this, embodiments of the present application provide a communication method and device, including the host wireless access node determining first information, and controlling the cell switching of the terminal device based on the first information, which means that the host wireless access node determines the terminal device. When deciding whether to perform cell switching, a judgment condition is added, which can reduce the number of switching times of the terminal equipment. For example, in the process of synchronous movement of the relay wireless access node and the terminal device, the host wireless access node can no longer frequently trigger the terminal device to perform cell switching based only on the signal strength of the cell, even if there are other cells whose signal strengths are higher than the middle one. Following the signal strength of the cell corresponding to the wireless access node, the host wireless access node also needs to consider the first information to determine whether to switch, thereby reducing the number of switching times of the terminal device and reducing the delay caused by multiple switchings, which can improve the terminal The stability of device communication. In addition, the first information is information related to the terminal device accessing the cell. The host wireless node controls the cell switching of the terminal device according to the first information, which can make the control result more accurate, so that the terminal device can perform cell switching at an appropriate time.
为了更好地介绍本申请实施例,下面结合附图介绍本申请实施例所提供的方法。在本申请的各个实施例对应的附图中,凡是可选的步骤均用虚线表示。本申请的各个实施例所提供的方法均可应用于图1、图2、图3以及图4所示的网络架构。例如,本申请的各个实施例所涉及的宿主无线接入节点可以为图2或图3或图4中的IAB宿主节点;本申请的各个实施例所涉及的中继无线接入节点可以为图2或图3或图4中的IAB节点;本申请的各个实施例所涉及的终端设备可以为图1、图2或图3或图4中的UE;本申请的各个实施例所涉及的接入与移动性管理功能网元可以为图1中的AMF;本申请的各个实施例所涉及的统一数据管理网元可以为图1中的UDM;本申请的各个实施例所涉及的应用功能网元可以为图1中的AF。In order to better introduce the embodiments of the present application, the methods provided by the embodiments of the present application are introduced below with reference to the accompanying drawings. In the drawings corresponding to various embodiments of the present application, all optional steps are represented by dotted lines. The methods provided by various embodiments of the present application can be applied to the network architectures shown in Figure 1, Figure 2, Figure 3 and Figure 4. For example, the host wireless access node involved in various embodiments of this application may be the IAB host node in Figure 2 or Figure 3 or Figure 4; the relay wireless access node involved in various embodiments of this application may be 2 or the IAB node in Figure 3 or Figure 4; the terminal equipment involved in various embodiments of the present application may be the UE in Figure 1, Figure 2, or Figure 3 or Figure 4; the interface involved in various embodiments of the present application The access and mobility management function network element may be the AMF in Figure 1; the unified data management network element involved in various embodiments of this application may be the UDM in Figure 1; the application function network involved in various embodiments of this application The element can be AF in Figure 1.
为方便说明,在后文的各个实施例中,可以将宿主无线接入节点用IAB宿主节点代替,将中继无线接入节点用IAB节点代替,将终端设备用UE代替,将接入与移动性管理功能网元用于AMF代替,将应用功能网元用AF代替,将统一数据管理网元用UDM代替。For convenience of explanation, in the following embodiments, the host wireless access node can be replaced by an IAB host node, the relay wireless access node can be replaced by an IAB node, the terminal device can be replaced by UE, and the access and mobility can be replaced. The performance management function network element is replaced by AMF, the application function network element is replaced by AF, and the unified data management network element is replaced by UDM.
需要说明的是,本申请实施例以终端设备与中继无线接入节点同步移动的应用场景为例进行描述。为了方便说明,在后文的各个实施例中,可以将与终端设备同步移动的中继无线接入节点或携带终端设备同步移动的无线接入节点用IAB节点1代替。随着IAB节点1和终端设备的同步移动可能会触发终端设备进行小区切换和宿主无线接入节点切换(如图4所示)。为方便说明,在后文的各个实施例中,可以将终端设备切换后的小区对应的中继无线接入节点用IAB节点2代替;将移动前IAB节点1对应的宿主无线接入节点用IAB宿主节点1代替;将宿主无线接入节点切换后的宿主无线接入节点用IAB宿主节点2 代替。另外,应理解的是,IAB节点1对应的宿主无线接入节点,可以理解为IAB节点1通过该宿主无线接入节点接入5GC,该宿主无线接入节点可以是IAB节点1的父节点,或者该宿主无线接入节点与IAB节点1之间存在一个或多个其它中继无线接入节点。为了便于理解,在后文的各个实施例中,以IAB节点1是宿主无线接入节点的子节点为例进行描述。It should be noted that the embodiments of this application are described by taking an application scenario in which a terminal device and a relay wireless access node move synchronously as an example. For convenience of explanation, in the following embodiments, the relay wireless access node that moves synchronously with the terminal device or the wireless access node that carries the terminal device and moves synchronously may be replaced by IAB node 1. With the synchronous movement of IAB node 1 and the terminal equipment, the terminal equipment may be triggered to perform cell switching and host wireless access node switching (as shown in Figure 4). For the convenience of explanation, in the following embodiments, the relay wireless access node corresponding to the cell after the terminal device is switched can be replaced by IAB node 2; the host wireless access node corresponding to IAB node 1 before movement can be replaced by IAB. Replace host node 1; replace the host wireless access node with IAB host node 2 after switching the host wireless access node. replace. In addition, it should be understood that the host wireless access node corresponding to the IAB node 1 can be understood as the IAB node 1 accessing the 5GC through the host wireless access node. The host wireless access node can be the parent node of the IAB node 1. Or there are one or more other relay wireless access nodes between the host wireless access node and the IAB node 1. For ease of understanding, in the following embodiments, descriptions will be made taking the IAB node 1 as a child node of the host wireless access node as an example.
图5为本申请实施例提供的通信方法的一种流程示意图。如图5所示,该方法可以包括如下内容。Figure 5 is a schematic flowchart of a communication method provided by an embodiment of the present application. As shown in Figure 5, the method may include the following content.
S501:IAB节点1与IAB宿主节点1建立连接。S501: IAB node 1 establishes a connection with IAB host node 1.
IAB节点1可以是IAB宿主节点1的子节点,或者IAB节点1与IAB宿主节点1之间存在至少一个其它IAB节点,本申请实施例对此不作限定。为了便于描述,本申请实施例以IAB节点1是IAB宿主节点1的子节点为例。IAB node 1 may be a child node of IAB host node 1, or there may be at least one other IAB node between IAB node 1 and IAB host node 1, which is not limited in the embodiment of this application. For ease of description, in the embodiment of this application, IAB node 1 is a child node of IAB host node 1 as an example.
在S501中,IAB节点1与IAB宿主节点1建立连接,通过该IAB宿主节点1接入5GC,本申请实施例对IAB节点1与IAB宿主节点1建立连接的具体实现过程不作限定。In S501, the IAB node 1 establishes a connection with the IAB host node 1, and accesses the 5GC through the IAB host node 1. The embodiment of this application does not limit the specific implementation process of establishing the connection between the IAB node 1 and the IAB host node 1.
在一种可能的实现方式中,IAB宿主节点1可以为IAB节点1分配小区资源。例如,IAB宿主节点1可以为IAB节点1分配一个或多个小区。该一个或多个小区中的任意一个小区可以用于IAB节点1与IAB宿主节点1之间的通信,或者用于IAB节点1的子节点(如UE或其它IAB节点)与IAB宿主节点1之间的通信。为了便于理解,本申请实施例以IAB宿主节点1为IAB节点1分配一个小区为例。本申请实施例中IAB节点1对应的小区可理解为IAB宿主节点1为IAB节点1分配的小区。为了便于描述,后文的各个实施例中将IAB节点1对应的小区称为第一小区。In a possible implementation manner, the IAB host node 1 can allocate cell resources to the IAB node 1 . For example, IAB host node 1 may allocate one or more cells to IAB node 1 . Any one of the one or more cells may be used for communication between IAB node 1 and IAB host node 1, or for communication between a child node of IAB node 1 (such as UE or other IAB node) and IAB host node 1. communication between. For ease of understanding, in the embodiment of this application, the IAB host node 1 allocates a cell to the IAB node 1 as an example. In the embodiment of the present application, the cell corresponding to the IAB node 1 can be understood as the cell allocated by the IAB host node 1 to the IAB node 1 . For convenience of description, the cell corresponding to IAB node 1 is called the first cell in the following embodiments.
示例性的,IAB宿主节点1可以向IAB节点1发送第一小区的标识信息,相应地,IAB节点1接收该第一小区的标识信息。在本申请实施例中,该第一小区可用于IAB节点1的子节点(如UE或其它IAB节点)与IAB宿主节点1之间的通信。该第一小区的小区类型是中继小区。有关中继小区的描述请参考前述描述,此处不再赘述。For example, the IAB host node 1 may send the identification information of the first cell to the IAB node 1, and accordingly, the IAB node 1 receives the identification information of the first cell. In this embodiment of the present application, the first cell can be used for communication between a child node of the IAB node 1 (such as a UE or other IAB node) and the IAB host node 1 . The cell type of the first cell is a relay cell. For the description of the relay cell, please refer to the foregoing description and will not be repeated here.
作为一个示例,第一小区的标识信息可以包括第一标识。该第一标识例如可以与IAB节点1相关,是用户可识别(或可读)的标识,如该第一标识为509路公交车IAB小区。As an example, the identification information of the first cell may include the first identification. For example, the first identification may be related to the IAB node 1 and be an identification identifiable (or readable) by the user. For example, the first identification may be the No. 509 bus IAB community.
作为一个示例,IAB宿主节点1可以确定该第一标识。例如,IAB宿主节点1可以根据IAB节点1的标识信息为IAB节点1对应的小区(即第一小区)配置第一标识。又例如,IAB宿主节点1可以接收来自IAB节点1对应的AMF(下文中将IAB节点1对应的AMF记为AMF 1)的第一标识。As an example, IAB host node 1 may determine the first identification. For example, the IAB host node 1 may configure a first identity for the cell corresponding to the IAB node 1 (ie, the first cell) according to the identity information of the IAB node 1 . For another example, IAB host node 1 may receive the first identifier from the AMF corresponding to IAB node 1 (hereinafter, the AMF corresponding to IAB node 1 is recorded as AMF 1).
示例性的,IAB节点1可以向AMF 1发送IAB节点1的标识信息,例如IAB节点1在注册过程中向AMF 1发送IAB节点1的标识信息,但本申请实施例对此不作限定。AMF 1可以确定该IAB节点1对应的小区的第一标识。例如,AMF 1可以根据该IAB节点1的标识信息为该IAB节点1对应的小区配置第一标识,或者,AMF 1可以接收来自UDM或AF的第一标识。例如,IAB节点1的签约信息中包括该第一标识。又例如,AF可以根据IAB节点1的标识信息为该IAB节点1对应的小区配置第一标识。应理解的是,本申请实施例对UDM或AF获取第一标识的具体实现方式并不限定于此。其中UDM或AF可以主动向AMF 1发送第一标识,或者也可以在接收到来自AMF 1的用于获取第一标识的请求消息后,向AMF 1发送该第一标识。进一步,AMF 1可以向IAB宿主节点1发送第二信息,该第二信息包括第一标识,如通过N2消息将第二信息发送给IAB宿主节点1;相 应地,IAB宿主节点1接收该第二信息,得到第一标识。应理解的是,AMF 1可以主动向IAB宿主节点1发送第二信息,或者也可以在接收到来自IAB宿主节点1的用于获取该第一标识的请求消息后,向IAB宿主节点1发送该第二信息,本申请实施例对此不作限定。For example, the IAB node 1 may send the identification information of the IAB node 1 to the AMF 1. For example, the IAB node 1 sends the identification information of the IAB node 1 to the AMF 1 during the registration process, but this is not limited in the embodiment of the present application. AMF 1 may determine the first identity of the cell corresponding to the IAB node 1. For example, AMF 1 may configure a first identity for the cell corresponding to IAB node 1 based on the identity information of IAB node 1, or AMF 1 may receive the first identity from UDM or AF. For example, the subscription information of IAB node 1 includes the first identifier. For another example, the AF may configure the first identity for the cell corresponding to the IAB node 1 based on the identity information of the IAB node 1 . It should be understood that the specific implementation manner of obtaining the first identifier by UDM or AF in the embodiment of the present application is not limited thereto. The UDM or AF may proactively send the first identity to AMF 1, or may send the first identity to AMF 1 after receiving a request message from AMF 1 for obtaining the first identity. Further, AMF 1 may send second information to IAB host node 1, where the second information includes the first identifier, such as sending the second information to IAB host node 1 through an N2 message; Accordingly, the IAB host node 1 receives the second information and obtains the first identification. It should be understood that AMF 1 may actively send the second information to IAB host node 1, or may send the second information to IAB host node 1 after receiving a request message from IAB host node 1 for obtaining the first identity. The second information is not limited by the embodiments of this application.
S502:UE通过IAB节点1与IAB宿主节点1建立连接。S502: The UE establishes a connection with the IAB host node 1 through the IAB node 1.
在S502中,UE可以与IAB节点1建立连接,并通过该IAB节点1与IAB宿主节点1建立连接,如建立RRC连接,通过该IAB宿主节点1接入5GC,本申请实施例对UE通过IAB节点1与IAB宿主节点1建立连接的具体实现过程不作限定。In S502, the UE can establish a connection with the IAB node 1, and establish a connection with the IAB host node 1 through the IAB node 1. For example, to establish an RRC connection, access the 5GC through the IAB host node 1. In this embodiment, the UE passes the IAB The specific implementation process of establishing a connection between node 1 and IAB host node 1 is not limited.
在本申请实施例中,UE通过接入第一小区与IAB宿主节点1建立连接。例如,UE可以接收来自IAB宿主节点1的第一小区的标识信息,如IAB宿主节点1通过IAB节点1广播第一小区的标识信息,UE根据该第一小区的标识信息接入第一小区。可选地,UE可以向IAB宿主节点1发送第一小区的标识信息,如通过RRC消息向IAB宿主节点1发送第一小区的标识信息。相应地,IAB宿主节点1根据该第一小区的标识信息可以确定UE是IAB节点1的子节点,或者确定UE是通过IAB节点1接入第一小区的终端设备。应理解的是,UE可以在接入第一小区后向IAB宿主节点1发送第一小区的标识信息,或者UE也可以在接入第一小区的过程中向IAB宿主节点1发送该第一小区的标识信息,本申请实施例对此不作限定。In this embodiment of the present application, the UE establishes a connection with the IAB host node 1 by accessing the first cell. For example, the UE may receive the identification information of the first cell from the IAB host node 1. For example, the IAB host node 1 broadcasts the identification information of the first cell through the IAB node 1, and the UE accesses the first cell based on the identification information of the first cell. Optionally, the UE may send the identification information of the first cell to the IAB host node 1, such as sending the identification information of the first cell to the IAB host node 1 through an RRC message. Correspondingly, the IAB host node 1 may determine that the UE is a child node of the IAB node 1 based on the identification information of the first cell, or determine that the UE is a terminal device that accesses the first cell through the IAB node 1 . It should be understood that the UE may send the identification information of the first cell to the IAB host node 1 after accessing the first cell, or the UE may also send the first cell identification information to the IAB host node 1 during the process of accessing the first cell. identification information, which is not limited in the embodiments of this application.
通过上述步骤S501和步骤S502,UE接入第一小区,即通过IAB宿主节点1接入5GC。Through the above steps S501 and S502, the UE accesses the first cell, that is, accesses the 5GC through the IAB host node 1.
S503:IAB宿主节点1确定第一信息,该第一信息是与UE接入小区相关的信息。S503: The IAB host node 1 determines the first information, which is information related to the UE's access to the cell.
IAB宿主节点1可以确定第一信息,该第一信息是与UE接入小区相关的信息,如是与UE接入中继小区相关的信息。在本申请实施例中,该第一信息可以用于IAB宿主节点1控制UE的小区切换,如第一信息包括小区切换规则(或称为中继小区切换规则);或者该第一信息可用于UE控制小区重选,如第一信息包括小区重选规则(或称为中继小区重选规则);或者该第一信息可用于IAB宿主节点1控制UE的小区切换以及用于UE控制小区重选,如第一信息包括小区切换规则和小区重选规则。The IAB host node 1 may determine the first information, which is information related to the UE's access to the cell, such as information related to the UE's access to the relay cell. In this embodiment of the present application, the first information can be used for the IAB host node 1 to control the cell switching of the UE. For example, the first information includes cell switching rules (or called relay cell switching rules); or the first information can be used for The UE controls cell reselection, for example, the first information includes cell reselection rules (also known as relay cell reselection rules); or the first information can be used by the IAB host node 1 to control the cell handover of the UE and for the UE to control cell reselection. selection, for example, the first information includes cell switching rules and cell reselection rules.
在S503中,IAB宿主节点1可以确定小区切换规则。该小区切换规则例如可以包括但不限定于如下规则中的一种或多种。In S503, the IAB host node 1 may determine the cell switching rule. The cell switching rules may include, for example, but are not limited to one or more of the following rules.
小区切换规则1,UE不进行小区切换。在小区切换规则1中,UE当前接入的小区(下文以第一小区为例)的优先级高于其它小区的优先级,意味着无论是否存在其他小区的信号强度高于第一小区的信号强度,UE皆不进行小区切换,这样可以使得UE在与IAB节点1同步移动的过程中保持与IAB节点1的连接关系,从而避免UE进行不必要的小区切换。Cell handover rule 1: UE does not perform cell handover. In cell switching rule 1, the priority of the cell currently accessed by the UE (the first cell is taken as an example below) is higher than the priority of other cells, which means that no matter whether there are other cells whose signal strength is higher than that of the first cell, Strength, the UE does not perform cell switching. This allows the UE to maintain the connection relationship with the IAB node 1 during the synchronous movement with the IAB node 1, thereby preventing the UE from performing unnecessary cell switching.
小区切换规则2,第一小区的信号强度大于或等于第一阈值,UE不进行小区切换。在小区切换规则2中,第一小区的信号强度大于或等于第一阈值,能够满足UE的通信要求,即便存在其他小区的信号强度高于第一小区的信号强度,UE也不进行小区切换,这样能够减少UE与IAB节点1同步移动过程中的小区切换,从而减少多次小区切换所产生的时延,提高通信稳定性和用户体验。Cell switching rule 2: the signal strength of the first cell is greater than or equal to the first threshold, and the UE does not perform cell switching. In cell switching rule 2, the signal strength of the first cell is greater than or equal to the first threshold and can meet the communication requirements of the UE. Even if the signal strength of other cells is higher than the signal strength of the first cell, the UE will not perform cell switching. This can reduce cell switching during the synchronous movement of the UE and the IAB node 1, thereby reducing the delay caused by multiple cell switching and improving communication stability and user experience.
小区切换规则3,第一小区的信号强度小于或等于第二阈值,UE进行小区切换。在小区切换规则3中,第一小区的信号强度小于或等于第二阈值,不能满足UE的通信要求,那么UE可以进行小区切换,以满足UE的通信要求。Cell switching rule 3: the signal strength of the first cell is less than or equal to the second threshold, and the UE performs cell switching. In cell switching rule 3, if the signal strength of the first cell is less than or equal to the second threshold and cannot meet the communication requirements of the UE, then the UE can perform cell switching to meet the communication requirements of the UE.
小区切换规则4,第一小区与UE具有关联关系(或绑定关系),UE不进行小区切换。 在小区切换规则4中,与UE具有关联关系的第一小区的优先级高于其它小区的优先级,无论是否存在其他小区的信号强度高于第一小区的信号强度,UE皆不进行小区切换,这样可以使得在UE与IAB节点1同步移动的过程中UE保持与其关联的小区对应的IAB节点1之间的连接关系,从而避免UE进行不必要的小区切换。Cell switching rule 4: The first cell has an association relationship (or binding relationship) with the UE, and the UE does not perform cell switching. In cell switching rule 4, the priority of the first cell associated with the UE is higher than the priority of other cells. Regardless of whether the signal strength of other cells is higher than the signal strength of the first cell, the UE will not perform cell switching. , this allows the UE to maintain the connection relationship between the IAB node 1 corresponding to its associated cell during the synchronous movement of the UE and the IAB node 1, thereby preventing the UE from performing unnecessary cell switching.
小区切换规则5,第一小区与UE具有关联关系,且第一小区的信号强度大于或等于第五阈值,UE不进行小区切换。在小区切换规则5中,第一小区与UE具有关联关系,且第一小区的信号强度大于或等于第五阈值,满足UE的通信要求,即便存在其他小区的信号强度高于第一小区的信号强度,UE也不进行小区切换,这样能够减少UE与IAB节点1同步移动过程中的小区切换,从而减少多次小区切换所产生的时延,提高通信稳定性和用户体验。Cell switching rule 5: the first cell has an association relationship with the UE, and the signal strength of the first cell is greater than or equal to the fifth threshold, the UE does not perform cell switching. In cell switching rule 5, the first cell has an associated relationship with the UE, and the signal strength of the first cell is greater than or equal to the fifth threshold, which meets the communication requirements of the UE, even if there are other cells whose signal strengths are higher than those of the first cell. Strength, the UE does not perform cell switching, which can reduce cell switching during the synchronous movement of the UE and IAB node 1, thereby reducing the delay caused by multiple cell switching, and improving communication stability and user experience.
小区切换规则6,第一小区与UE具有关联关系,且第一小区的信号强度小于或等于第六阈值,UE进行小区切换。在小区切换规则6中,第一小区与UE具有关联关系,但第一小区的信号强度小于或等于第六阈值,不满足UE的通信要求,那么UE可以进行小区切换,以满足UE的通信要求。Cell switching rule 6: the first cell has an association relationship with the UE, and the signal strength of the first cell is less than or equal to the sixth threshold, the UE performs cell switching. In cell switching rule 6, the first cell has an association relationship with the UE, but the signal strength of the first cell is less than or equal to the sixth threshold and does not meet the communication requirements of the UE, then the UE can perform cell switching to meet the communication requirements of the UE. .
需要说明的是,上述小区切换规则中的第一小区可以理解为UE当前接入的小区。该第一小区的描述请参考S501和S502的相关内容,此处不再赘述。另外,上述的第一阈值、第二阈值、第五阈值以及第六阈值可以预先定义的,或者是IAB宿主节点1配置的,本申请实施例对此不作限定。该第一阈值可以大于或等于第二阈值。如果第一阈值等于第二阈值,那么第一小区的信号强度大于或等于第一阈值,UE不进行小区切换,而第一小区的信号强度小于第一阈值,UE进行小区切换;或者,第一小区的信号强度大于第一阈值,UE不进行小区切换,而第一小区的信号强度小于或等于第一阈值,UE进行小区切换;本申请实施例对此不作限定。类似的,第五阈值可以大于或等于第六阈值。其中第五阈值等于第六阈值的相关描述请参考第一阈值等于第二阈值的相关描述,此处不再赘述。It should be noted that the first cell in the above cell handover rule can be understood as the cell currently accessed by the UE. For the description of the first cell, please refer to the relevant contents of S501 and S502, which will not be described again here. In addition, the above-mentioned first threshold, second threshold, fifth threshold and sixth threshold may be predefined or configured by the IAB host node 1, which is not limited in the embodiment of the present application. The first threshold may be greater than or equal to the second threshold. If the first threshold is equal to the second threshold, then the signal strength of the first cell is greater than or equal to the first threshold, the UE does not perform cell switching, and the signal strength of the first cell is less than the first threshold, the UE performs cell switching; or, the first If the signal strength of the cell is greater than the first threshold, the UE does not perform cell switching, but if the signal strength of the first cell is less than or equal to the first threshold, the UE performs cell switching; this is not limited in the embodiments of the present application. Similarly, the fifth threshold may be greater than or equal to the sixth threshold. For the relevant description of the fifth threshold being equal to the sixth threshold, please refer to the relevant description of the first threshold being equal to the second threshold, which will not be described again here.
需要说明的是,本申请实施例以IAB节点1对应的一个小区为例进行描述,那么UE与第一小区具有关联关系,也可以理解为UE与IAB节点1具有关联关系。另外,UE与第一小区的关联关系,可理解为UE与IAB节点1具有同步移动的关系;或者可以理解为UE通过IAB节点1与IAB宿主节点1建立连接的关系;或者可以理解为UE在设定时长内与IAB节点1之间存在固定的位置关系;但本申请实施例并不限定于此。It should be noted that the embodiment of this application takes a cell corresponding to IAB node 1 as an example to describe, then the UE has an association relationship with the first cell, which can also be understood as the UE has an association relationship with the IAB node 1. In addition, the association relationship between the UE and the first cell can be understood as a synchronous movement relationship between the UE and the IAB node 1; or it can be understood as a relationship between the UE establishing a connection with the IAB host node 1 through the IAB node 1; or it can be understood as a relationship between the UE and the IAB host node 1. There is a fixed position relationship with IAB node 1 within the set time period; however, the embodiment of the present application is not limited to this.
作为一个示例,IAB宿主节点1可以为UE配置小区切换规则。例如,IAB宿主节点1可以为通过IAB节点1接入第一小区的UE配置小区切换规则。具体的,IAB宿主节点1可以接收来自UE的第一小区的标识信息,并根据该第一小区的标识信息确定UE是通过IAB节点1接入第一小区的终端设备,以及为该UE配置小区切换规则。应理解的是,IAB宿主节点1确定UE是通过IAB节点1接入第一小区的终端设备的具体实现方式并不限定于此。例如,IAB宿主节点1可以为IAB节点1接入第一小区的UE配置如下规则中一种或多种:UE不进行小区切换;第一小区的信号强度大于或等于第一阈值,UE不进行小区切换;或者,第一小区的信号强度小于或等于第二阈值,UE进行小区切换。As an example, the IAB host node 1 can configure cell switching rules for the UE. For example, IAB host node 1 may configure cell switching rules for UEs that access the first cell through IAB node 1. Specifically, the IAB host node 1 may receive the identification information of the first cell from the UE, determine based on the identification information of the first cell that the UE is a terminal device that accesses the first cell through the IAB node 1, and configure the cell for the UE. Switch rules. It should be understood that the specific implementation manner in which the IAB host node 1 determines that the UE is a terminal device that accesses the first cell through the IAB node 1 is not limited to this. For example, the IAB host node 1 can configure one or more of the following rules for the UE that the IAB node 1 accesses the first cell: the UE does not perform cell switching; the signal strength of the first cell is greater than or equal to the first threshold, and the UE does not perform cell switching. Cell switching; or, the signal strength of the first cell is less than or equal to the second threshold, and the UE performs cell switching.
作为又一个示例,IAB宿主节点1可以接收来自UE对应的AMF(下文记为AMF 2)的第二指示信息,该第二指示信息可用于指示UE与第一小区具有关联关系;以及,IAB宿主节点1根据该第二指示信息确定(或配置)小区切换规则。AMF 2可以确定第二信息,该第二信息可指示UE与第一小区具有关联关系,并向IAB宿主节点1发送该第二信息(或 第二指示信息),如通过N2消息向IAB宿主节点发送第二信息。进一步,IAB宿主节点1根据UE与第一小区之间的关联关系可配置如下规则中的一种或多种:UE与第一小区具有关联关系,UE不进行小区切换;UE与第一小区具有关联关系,且第一小区的信号强度大于或等于第五阈值,UE不进行小区切换;或者,UE与第一小区具有关联关系,但第一小区的信号强度小于或等于第六阈值,UE进行小区切换。As another example, the IAB host node 1 may receive second indication information from the AMF corresponding to the UE (hereinafter referred to as AMF 2). The second indication information may be used to indicate that the UE has an association relationship with the first cell; and, the IAB host node Node 1 determines (or configures) cell switching rules according to the second indication information. AMF 2 may determine second information, which may indicate that the UE has an association relationship with the first cell, and send the second information to IAB host node 1 (or second indication information), such as sending the second information to the IAB host node through the N2 message. Further, the IAB host node 1 can configure one or more of the following rules according to the association relationship between the UE and the first cell: the UE has an association relationship with the first cell, and the UE does not perform cell switching; the UE has an association relationship with the first cell. If the UE has an association relationship with the first cell, but the signal strength of the first cell is less than or equal to the sixth threshold, the UE will not perform cell switching. Cell switching.
其中,AMF 2确定第二信息的具体实现过程可包括但不限于如下内容:AMF 2接收来自UE的接入信息,如UE可以在注册流程中向AMF2发送该接入信息,该接入信息包括第一小区的标识信息(和/或IAB节点1的标识信息);AMF 2从UDM中获取第三信息,该第三信息例如为UE的签约信息,该第三信息中包括与UE具有关联关系的一个或多个小区的标识信息(和/或与UE具有关联关系的一个或多个IAB节点的标识信息),其中的一个或多个小区包括第一小区(和/或一个或多个IAB节点包括IAB节点1);进一步,AMF 2根据接入信息和第三信息,可以确定第二信息,即确定UE与第一小区之间存在关联关系。其中UDM可以主动向AMF 2发送第三信息,也可以在接收到AMF 2的用于获取第三信息的请求消息后向AMF 2发送第三信息,本申请实施例对此不作限定。Among them, the specific implementation process of AMF 2 determining the second information may include but is not limited to the following: AMF 2 receives access information from the UE. For example, the UE may send the access information to AMF 2 during the registration process. The access information includes The identification information of the first cell (and/or the identification information of the IAB node 1); AMF 2 obtains the third information from the UDM. The third information is, for example, the subscription information of the UE. The third information includes the association relationship with the UE. Identification information of one or more cells (and/or identification information of one or more IAB nodes that are associated with the UE), where one or more cells include the first cell (and/or one or more IAB nodes) The node includes an IAB node 1); further, the AMF 2 can determine the second information according to the access information and the third information, that is, determine that there is an association relationship between the UE and the first cell. The UDM may actively send the third information to AMF 2, or may send the third information to AMF 2 after receiving a request message from AMF 2 for obtaining the third information. This is not limited in the embodiments of this application.
作为再一个示例,IAB宿主节点1可以接收来自UE的第二指示信息,该第二指示信息可用于指示UE与第一小区具有关联关系;以及,IAB宿主节点1根据该第二指示信息确定小区切换规则。UE可以生成第二指示信息,并向IAB宿主节点1发送该第二指示信息,如通过RRC消息向IAB宿主节点发送该第二指示信息。进一步,IAB宿主节点1根据UE与第一小区之间的关联关系可配置如下规则中的一种或多种:UE与第一小区具有关联关系,UE不进行小区切换;UE与第一小区具有关联关系,且第一小区的信号强度大于或等于第五阈值,UE不进行小区切换;或者,UE与第一小区具有关联关系,但第一小区的信号强度小于或等于第六阈值,UE进行小区切换。As another example, the IAB host node 1 may receive second indication information from the UE, and the second indication information may be used to indicate that the UE has an association relationship with the first cell; and, the IAB host node 1 determines the cell based on the second indication information. Switch rules. The UE may generate second indication information and send the second indication information to the IAB host node 1, such as sending the second indication information to the IAB host node through an RRC message. Further, the IAB host node 1 can configure one or more of the following rules according to the association relationship between the UE and the first cell: the UE has an association relationship with the first cell, and the UE does not perform cell switching; the UE has an association relationship with the first cell. If the UE has an association relationship with the first cell, but the signal strength of the first cell is less than or equal to the sixth threshold, the UE will not perform cell switching. Cell switching.
其中,UE可以生成第二指示信息并向IAB宿主节点1发送该第二指示信息的具体实现过程可包括但不限于如下内容:IAB宿主节点1广播的第一标识;UE接收来自IAB宿主节点1的第一标识,该第一标识可以与IAB节点1相关,是用户可识别(或可读)的标识;UE显示该第一标识,如通过人机交互接口显示第一标识;用户根据第一标识选择是否接入第一小区,本申请实施例以用户选择接入第一小区为例,相应地,UE接收来自用户选择接入第一小区的操作指示,并根据该操作指示可以确定UE与第一小区具有关联相关;进一步,UE响应于该操作指示通过IAB节点1与IAB宿主节点1建立连接,以及生成第二指示信息,并向IAB宿主节点1发送该第二指示信息。其中有关第一标识的描述请参考S501的相关内容,此处不再赘述。The specific implementation process in which the UE can generate the second indication information and send the second indication information to the IAB host node 1 may include but is not limited to the following: the first identifier broadcast by the IAB host node 1; the UE receiving the second indication information from the IAB host node 1 The first identifier can be related to the IAB node 1 and is an identifier identifiable (or readable) by the user; the UE displays the first identifier, such as displaying the first identifier through a human-computer interaction interface; the user displays the first identifier according to the first To identify whether to choose to access the first cell, the embodiment of this application takes the user's choice to access the first cell as an example. Correspondingly, the UE receives an operation instruction from the user to choose to access the first cell, and according to the operation instruction, it can determine whether the UE is connected to the first cell. The first cell is associated; further, in response to the operation instruction, the UE establishes a connection with the IAB host node 1 through the IAB node 1, generates second indication information, and sends the second indication information to the IAB host node 1. For the description of the first identifier, please refer to the relevant content of S501 and will not be repeated here.
图6A以IAB节点1为509路公交车中安装的IAB节点,第一标识为509路公交车IAB小区为例,UE显示可用小区,该可用小区的显示区域包括第一小区的第一标识。例如,UE位于第一小区的覆盖范围内,该UE在可用小区的显示区域内显示第一标识。又例如,UE可以主动搜索可用小区或响应于用户搜索可用小区的操作指示搜索可用小区,并在可用户小区的显示区域内显示搜索结果,该搜索结果包括第一标识。进一步,用户可点击(或触摸)509路公交车IAB小区选项来选择接入第一小区,例如用户乘坐509路公交车,用户可以选择接入第一小区;相应地,UE响应于用户的操作接入第一小区,以及确定UE与第一小区具有关联关系。另外,用户也可以选择不接入第一小区,例如用户没有乘坐509路公交车等。 Figure 6A takes IAB node 1 as an IAB node installed in bus No. 509, and the first identifier is the IAB cell of bus No. 509. The UE displays available cells, and the display area of the available cells includes the first identifier of the first cell. For example, the UE is located within the coverage of the first cell, and the UE displays the first identification in the display area of the available cell. For another example, the UE may actively search for available cells or search for available cells in response to a user operation instruction to search for available cells, and display the search results in the display area of the user-available cells, where the search results include the first identifier. Further, the user can click (or touch) the IAB cell option on the No. 509 bus to choose to access the first cell. For example, if the user takes the No. 509 bus, the user can choose to access the first cell; accordingly, the UE responds to the user's operation Access the first cell, and determine that the UE has an association relationship with the first cell. In addition, the user can also choose not to access the first cell, for example, the user does not take the No. 509 bus, etc.
在一种可能的实现方式中,UE可以解除与第一小区之间的关联关系,以及向IAB宿主节点1发送第三指示信息,该第三指示信息用于解除UE与第一小区之间的关联关系。相应地,IAB宿主节点1接收到第三指示信息后,解除UE与第一小区之间的关联关系。例如,UE可以基于人机交互接口解除与第一小区之间的关联关系,如图6B所示。在图6B中,UE显示是否断开与509路公交车IAB小区之间的连接,如果用户点击(或触摸)是选项,如用户到站下车,则UE断开与第一小区之间的连接,并解除与第一小区之间的关联关系。又例如,UE可以接收来自IAB宿主节点1的有关IAB节点1故障的指示信息,并根据该指示信息断开与第一小区之间的连接,以及解除与第一小区之间的关联关系。又例如,第一小区的信号强度不满足UE的通信要求,UE可以断开与第一小区之间的连接,并解除与第一小区之间的关联关系。再例如,UE可以根据自身与IAB节点1之间的位置关系,断开与第一小区之间的连接,并解除与第一小区之间的关联关系。例如,UE与IAB节点1之间的距离大于设定阈值,UE解除与第一小区之间的关联关系。应理解的是,UE还可以通过其它等效的方式解除与第一小区之间的关联关系,本申请实施例对此不作限定。In a possible implementation, the UE can cancel the association relationship with the first cell, and send third indication information to the IAB host node 1, where the third indication information is used to cancel the association relationship between the UE and the first cell. connection relation. Correspondingly, after receiving the third indication information, the IAB host node 1 releases the association relationship between the UE and the first cell. For example, the UE may cancel the association with the first cell based on the human-computer interaction interface, as shown in Figure 6B. In Figure 6B, the UE displays whether to disconnect from the IAB cell of bus No. 509. If the user clicks (or touches) the option, and if the user gets off at the station, the UE disconnects from the first cell. Connect and cancel the association with the first cell. For another example, the UE may receive indication information from the IAB host node 1 about the failure of the IAB node 1, and disconnect the connection with the first cell according to the indication information, and cancel the association with the first cell. For another example, if the signal strength of the first cell does not meet the communication requirements of the UE, the UE may disconnect from the first cell and terminate the association with the first cell. For another example, the UE may disconnect the connection with the first cell and cancel the association relationship with the first cell according to the positional relationship between the UE and the IAB node 1 . For example, if the distance between the UE and the IAB node 1 is greater than the set threshold, the UE releases the association relationship with the first cell. It should be understood that the UE can also cancel the association relationship with the first cell through other equivalent methods, which is not limited in this embodiment of the present application.
在上述介绍中,UE显示第一标识,根据用户选择接入第一小区的操作指示确定UE与第一小区具有关联关系,并向IAB宿主节点1发送第二指示信息。在另一种可能的实现方式中,UE可以根据第一标识和状态信息,确定UE与第一小区具有关联关系,并向IAB宿主节点1发送该第二指示信息。其中,该状态信息包括UE的位置信息,或包括UE与IAB节点1之间的位置关系,或包括UE的位置信息和UE与IAB节点1之间的位置关系。例如,UE与第一标识对应的IAB节点1之间距离在设定时长内保持不变,UE可以确定UE与第一小区具有关联关系。又例如,UE的位置与第一标识对应的IAB节点1的位置在设定时长内重合,UE也可以确定UE与第一小区具有关联关系。应理解的是,本申请实施例对UE根据第一标识和状态信息确定UE与第一小区具有关联关系的具体实现过程并不限定于此。In the above introduction, the UE displays the first identifier, determines that the UE has an association relationship with the first cell according to the operation instruction of the user selecting to access the first cell, and sends the second indication information to the IAB host node 1 . In another possible implementation, the UE may determine that the UE has an association relationship with the first cell based on the first identification and status information, and send the second indication information to the IAB host node 1 . The status information includes the location information of the UE, or the location relationship between the UE and the IAB node 1, or the location information of the UE and the location relationship between the UE and the IAB node 1. For example, if the distance between the UE and the IAB node 1 corresponding to the first identifier remains unchanged within a set time period, the UE may determine that the UE has an association relationship with the first cell. For another example, if the location of the UE coincides with the location of the IAB node 1 corresponding to the first identifier within a set time period, the UE may also determine that the UE has an association relationship with the first cell. It should be understood that the embodiment of the present application is not limited to the specific implementation process of the UE determining that the UE has an association relationship with the first cell based on the first identification and status information.
前面介绍了IAB宿主节点1确定小区切换规则。在另一种可能的实现方式中,IAB宿主节点1可以确定小区重选规则。该小区重选规则例如可以包括如下规则中的一种或多种:It was introduced earlier that the IAB host node 1 determines the cell switching rules. In another possible implementation, the IAB host node 1 may determine the cell reselection rule. The cell reselection rules may include, for example, one or more of the following rules:
小区重选规则1,UE不进行小区重选。在小区重选规则1中,UE不进行小区重选,意味着无论是否存在其他小区的信号强度高于第一小区的信号强度,UE皆不进行小区重选,这样可以使得UE在与IAB节点1同步移动的过程中不接入其它小区,从而能够避免UE接入其它小区后再切换至第一小区的过程。Cell reselection rule 1: UE does not perform cell reselection. In cell reselection rule 1, the UE does not perform cell reselection, which means that no matter whether there are other cells whose signal strength is higher than the signal strength of the first cell, the UE does not perform cell reselection. This allows the UE to communicate with the IAB node. 1. During the synchronous movement, other cells are not accessed, thereby avoiding the process of the UE accessing other cells and then switching to the first cell.
小区重选规则2,第一小区的信号强度大于或等于第三阈值,UE不进行小区重选。在小区重选规则2中,第一小区的信号强度大于或等于第三阈值,能够满足UE的通信要求,即便存在其他小区的信号强度高于第一小区的信号强度,UE也不接入其它小区,这样能够减少UE与IAB节点1同步移动过程中的小区切换,从而减少多次小区切换所产生的时延,提高通信稳定性和用户体验。Cell reselection rule 2: the signal strength of the first cell is greater than or equal to the third threshold, and the UE does not perform cell reselection. In cell reselection rule 2, the signal strength of the first cell is greater than or equal to the third threshold and can meet the communication requirements of the UE. Even if the signal strength of other cells is higher than the signal strength of the first cell, the UE will not access other cells. cell, this can reduce cell switching during the synchronous movement of the UE and IAB node 1, thereby reducing the delay caused by multiple cell switching and improving communication stability and user experience.
小区重选规则3,第一小区的信号强度小于或等于第四阈值,UE进行小区重选。在小区重选规则3中,第一小区的信号强度小于或等于第四阈值,不能满足UE的通信要求,那么UE可以进行小区重选,进入其它小区,以满足UE的通信要求。Cell reselection rule 3: the signal strength of the first cell is less than or equal to the fourth threshold, and the UE performs cell reselection. In cell reselection rule 3, if the signal strength of the first cell is less than or equal to the fourth threshold and cannot meet the UE's communication requirements, the UE can perform cell reselection and enter other cells to meet the UE's communication requirements.
小区重选规则4,第一小区与UE具有关联关系,UE不进行小区重选。在小区重选规则4中,第一小区与UE具有关联关系,无论是否存在其他小区的信号强度高于第一小区 的信号强度,UE皆不进行小区重选,这样可以使得在UE与IAB节点1同步移动的过程中UE保持与其关联的小区对应的IAB节点1之间的连接关系,从而避免UE接入其它小区后切换至第一小区的过程。Cell reselection rule 4: the first cell has an association relationship with the UE, and the UE does not perform cell reselection. In cell reselection rule 4, the first cell has an association relationship with the UE, regardless of whether there are other cells with higher signal strength than the first cell. signal strength, the UE does not perform cell reselection. This allows the UE to maintain the connection relationship between the IAB node 1 corresponding to its associated cell during the synchronous movement of the UE and the IAB node 1, thus preventing the UE from accessing other cells. Then switch to the first cell.
小区重选规则5,第一小区与UE具有关联关系,且第一小区的信号强度大于或等于第七阈值,UE不进行小区重选。在小区重选规则5中,第一小区与UE具有关联关系,且第一小区的信号强度大于或等于第七阈值,满足UE的通信要求,即便存在其他小区的信号强度高于第一小区的信号强度,UE也不进行小区重选,这样能够减少UE与IAB节点1同步移动过程中的小区切换,从而减少多次小区切换所产生的时延,提高通信稳定性和用户体验。Cell reselection rule 5: the first cell has an association relationship with the UE, and the signal strength of the first cell is greater than or equal to the seventh threshold, the UE does not perform cell reselection. In cell reselection rule 5, the first cell has an association relationship with the UE, and the signal strength of the first cell is greater than or equal to the seventh threshold, which meets the communication requirements of the UE, even if there are other cells whose signal strengths are higher than the first cell. Signal strength, the UE does not perform cell reselection, which can reduce cell switching during the synchronous movement of the UE and IAB node 1, thereby reducing the delay caused by multiple cell switching, and improving communication stability and user experience.
小区重选规则6,第一小区与UE具有关联关系,且第一小区的信号强度小于或等于第八阈值,UE进行小区重选。在小区重选规则6中,第一小区与UE具有关联关系,但第一小区的信号强度小于或等于第八阈值,不满足UE的通信要求,那么UE可以进行小区重选,接入其它小区,以满足UE的通信要求。Cell reselection rule 6: the first cell has an association relationship with the UE, and the signal strength of the first cell is less than or equal to the eighth threshold, the UE performs cell reselection. In cell reselection rule 6, the first cell has an association relationship with the UE, but the signal strength of the first cell is less than or equal to the eighth threshold and does not meet the communication requirements of the UE, then the UE can perform cell reselection and access other cells. , to meet the communication requirements of the UE.
需要说明的是,UE不进行小区重选,可理解为UE确定接入第一小区。UE进行小区重选,可理解为UE确定接入其它小区,如除了第一小区之外的小区。It should be noted that if the UE does not perform cell reselection, it can be understood that the UE determines to access the first cell. When the UE performs cell reselection, it can be understood that the UE determines to access other cells, such as cells other than the first cell.
需要说明的是,上述的第三阈值、第四阈值、第七阈值以及第八阈值可以预先定义的,或者是IAB宿主节点1配置的,本申请实施例对此不作限定。该第三阈值可以大于或等于第四阈值。如果第三阈值等于第四阈值,那么第一小区的信号强度大于或等于第三阈值,UE不进行小区重选,而第一小区的信号强度小于第三阈值,UE进行小区重选;或者,第一小区的信号强度大于第三阈值,UE不进行小区重选,而第一小区的信号强度小于或等于第三阈值,UE进行小区重选;本申请实施例对此不作限定。类似的,第七阈值可以大于或等于第八阈值。其中第七阈值等于第八阈值的相关描述请参考第三阈值等于第四阈值的相关描述,此处不再赘述。It should be noted that the above-mentioned third threshold, fourth threshold, seventh threshold and eighth threshold may be predefined or configured by the IAB host node 1, which is not limited in the embodiment of the present application. The third threshold may be greater than or equal to the fourth threshold. If the third threshold is equal to the fourth threshold, then the signal strength of the first cell is greater than or equal to the third threshold, the UE does not perform cell reselection, and the signal strength of the first cell is less than the third threshold, the UE performs cell reselection; or, If the signal strength of the first cell is greater than the third threshold, the UE does not perform cell reselection, but if the signal strength of the first cell is less than or equal to the third threshold, the UE performs cell reselection; this is not limited in the embodiments of this application. Similarly, the seventh threshold may be greater than or equal to the eighth threshold. For the description of the seventh threshold being equal to the eighth threshold, please refer to the related description of the third threshold being equal to the fourth threshold, which will not be described again here.
作为一个示例,IAB宿主节点1可以为UE配置小区重选规则。例如,IAB宿主节点1可以为通过IAB节点1接入第一小区的UE配置小区重选规则。具体的,IAB宿主节点1可以接收来自UE的第一小区的标识信息,并根据该第一小区的标识信息确定UE是通过IAB节点1接入第一小区的终端设备,以及为该UE配置小区重选规则。应理解的是,IAB宿主节点1确定UE是通过IAB节点1接入第一小区的终端设备的具体实现方式并不限定于此。例如,IAB宿主节点1可以为IAB节点1接入第一小区的UE配置如下规则中一种或多种:UE不进行小区重选;第一小区的信号强度大于或等于第三阈值,UE不进行小区重选;或者,第一小区的信号强度小于或等于第四阈值,UE进行小区重选。As an example, the IAB host node 1 can configure cell reselection rules for the UE. For example, IAB host node 1 may configure cell reselection rules for UEs that access the first cell through IAB node 1. Specifically, the IAB host node 1 may receive the identification information of the first cell from the UE, determine based on the identification information of the first cell that the UE is a terminal device that accesses the first cell through the IAB node 1, and configure the cell for the UE. Reselection rules. It should be understood that the specific implementation manner in which the IAB host node 1 determines that the UE is a terminal device that accesses the first cell through the IAB node 1 is not limited to this. For example, the IAB host node 1 can configure one or more of the following rules for the UE that the IAB node 1 accesses the first cell: the UE does not perform cell reselection; the signal strength of the first cell is greater than or equal to the third threshold, the UE does not Perform cell reselection; or, if the signal strength of the first cell is less than or equal to the fourth threshold, the UE performs cell reselection.
作为又一个示例,IAB宿主节点1可以接收来自UE对应的AMF(下文记为AMF 2)的第二指示信息,该第二指示信息可用于指示UE与第一小区具有关联关系;以及,IAB宿主节点1根据该第二指示信息确定(或配置)小区重选规则。AMF 2可以确定第二信息,该第二信息可指示UE与第一小区具有关联关系,并向IAB宿主节点1发送该第二信息(或第二指示信息),如通过N2消息向IAB宿主节点发送第二信息。进一步,IAB宿主节点1根据UE与第一小区之间的关联关系可配置如下规则中的一种或多种:UE与第一小区具有关联关系,UE不进行小区重选;UE与第一小区具有关联关系,且第一小区的信号强度大于或等于第七阈值,UE不进行小区重选;或者,UE与第一小区具有关联关系,但第一小区的信号强度小于或等于第八阈值,UE进行小区重选。其中,AMF 2确定第二信息的具 体实现过程可参考前述描述,此处不再赘述。As another example, the IAB host node 1 may receive second indication information from the AMF corresponding to the UE (hereinafter referred to as AMF 2). The second indication information may be used to indicate that the UE has an association relationship with the first cell; and, the IAB host node Node 1 determines (or configures) cell reselection rules according to the second indication information. AMF 2 may determine second information, which may indicate that the UE has an association relationship with the first cell, and send the second information (or second indication information) to the IAB host node 1, such as to the IAB host node through an N2 message. Send a second message. Further, the IAB host node 1 can configure one or more of the following rules according to the association relationship between the UE and the first cell: the UE has an association relationship with the first cell, and the UE does not perform cell reselection; the UE and the first cell There is an association relationship, and the signal strength of the first cell is greater than or equal to the seventh threshold, the UE does not perform cell reselection; or, the UE has an association relationship with the first cell, but the signal strength of the first cell is less than or equal to the eighth threshold, The UE performs cell reselection. Among them, AMF 2 determines the specificity of the second information For the entity implementation process, please refer to the foregoing description and will not be repeated here.
作为再一个示例,IAB宿主节点1可以接收来自UE的第二指示信息,该第二指示信息可用于指示UE与第一小区具有关联关系;以及,IAB宿主节点1根据该第二指示信息确定小区重选规则。UE可以生成第二指示信息,并向IAB宿主节点1发送该第二指示信息,如通过RRC消息向IAB宿主节点发送该第二指示信息。进一步,IAB宿主节点1根据UE与第一小区之间的关联关系可配置如下规则中的一种或多种:UE与第一小区具有关联关系,UE不进行小区重选;UE与第一小区具有关联关系,且第一小区的信号强度大于或等于第五阈值,UE不进行小区重选;或者,UE与第一小区具有关联关系,但第一小区的信号强度小于或等于第六阈值,UE进行小区重选。其中,UE生成第二指示信息并向IAB宿主节点1发送该第二指示信息的具体实现过程请参考前述描述,此处不再赘述。As another example, the IAB host node 1 may receive second indication information from the UE, and the second indication information may be used to indicate that the UE has an association relationship with the first cell; and, the IAB host node 1 determines the cell based on the second indication information. Reselection rules. The UE may generate second indication information and send the second indication information to the IAB host node 1, such as sending the second indication information to the IAB host node through an RRC message. Further, the IAB host node 1 can configure one or more of the following rules according to the association relationship between the UE and the first cell: the UE has an association relationship with the first cell, and the UE does not perform cell reselection; the UE and the first cell There is an association relationship, and the signal strength of the first cell is greater than or equal to the fifth threshold, the UE does not perform cell reselection; or, the UE has an association relationship with the first cell, but the signal strength of the first cell is less than or equal to the sixth threshold, The UE performs cell reselection. For the specific implementation process of the UE generating the second indication information and sending the second indication information to the IAB host node 1, please refer to the foregoing description, which will not be described again here.
应理解的是,在S503中,IAB宿主节点1可以确定小区切换规则和小区重选规则,具体实现过程请参考前述描述,此处不再赘述。It should be understood that in S503, the IAB host node 1 can determine the cell switching rule and the cell reselection rule. Please refer to the foregoing description for the specific implementation process, which will not be described again here.
在一种可能的实现方式中,IAB宿主节点1可以向IAB宿主节点2发送第一信息。该IAB宿主节点2是IAB节点1进行IAB宿主节点切换后的IAB宿主节点。例如,IAB节点1的移动触发IAB宿主节点切换,IAB节点1从IAB宿主节点1切换至IAB宿主节点2,IAB宿主节点1可以向IAB宿主节点2发送第一信息,如将第一信息携带在UE上下文中发送给IAB宿主节点2。IAB宿主节点2接收到第一信息后可以根据该第一信息控制UE的小区切换。可选地,IAB宿主节点2接收到第一信息后,可以对该第一信息进行重配置,如对阈值进行调整等,并根据重配置后的第一信息控制UE的小区切换。其中IAB宿主节点2对第一信息进行重配置的具体实现过程请参考IAB宿主节点1确定第一信息的具体实现过程,此处不再赘述。In a possible implementation, the IAB host node 1 may send the first information to the IAB host node 2. The IAB host node 2 is the IAB host node after IAB node 1 switches the IAB host node. For example, the movement of IAB node 1 triggers IAB host node switching, and IAB node 1 switches from IAB host node 1 to IAB host node 2. IAB host node 1 can send the first information to IAB host node 2, such as carrying the first information in Sent to IAB host node 2 in the UE context. After receiving the first information, the IAB host node 2 can control the cell switching of the UE according to the first information. Optionally, after receiving the first information, the IAB host node 2 can reconfigure the first information, such as adjusting the threshold, and control the cell switching of the UE according to the reconfigured first information. For the specific implementation process of the IAB host node 2 reconfiguring the first information, please refer to the specific implementation process of the IAB host node 1 determining the first information, which will not be described again here.
在S503中,IAB宿主节点1确定第一信息。如果该第一信息包括小区重选规则,则可以执行步骤S504、S505以及S506所示的内容。如果第一信息不包括小区重选规则,则可以执行步骤S505所示的内容。In S503, the IAB host node 1 determines the first information. If the first information includes a cell reselection rule, the contents shown in steps S504, S505, and S506 may be performed. If the first information does not include the cell reselection rule, the content shown in step S505 may be performed.
S504:IAB宿主节点1向UE发送第一信息;相应地,UE接收来自IAB宿主节点1的第一信息。S504: The IAB host node 1 sends the first information to the UE; accordingly, the UE receives the first information from the IAB host node 1.
S504为可选步骤。例如,第一信息包括小区重选规则,IAB宿主节点1向UE发送第一信息。当然,IAB宿主节点1也可以向UE发送小区切换规则,本申请实施例对此不作限定。S504 is an optional step. For example, the first information includes cell reselection rules, and the IAB host node 1 sends the first information to the UE. Of course, the IAB host node 1 can also send cell switching rules to the UE, which is not limited in the embodiments of this application.
可选地,该第一信息还可以包括第四指示信息,该第四指示信息指示非中继小区的小区切换规则。该非中继小区的小区切换规则例如可以为根据小区的信号强度控制小区重选。Optionally, the first information may also include fourth indication information, the fourth indication information indicating the cell switching rule of the non-relay cell. The cell switching rule of the non-relay cell may be, for example, controlling cell reselection according to the signal strength of the cell.
S505:IAB宿主节点1根据第一信息控制UE的小区切换。S505: The IAB host node 1 controls the cell switching of the UE according to the first information.
在S505中,第一信息包括小区切换规则,IAB宿主节点1可以根据小区切换规则控制(或确定)UE的小区切换。其中,UE处于连接态,且UE当前接入的小区为第一小区。另外,IAB宿主节点1控制UE的小区切换,可理解为IAB宿主节点1触发UE进行小区切换或不触发UE进行小区切换;或者可理解为IAB宿主节点1发起(或激活)UE的小区切换或不发起(或不激活)UE的小区切换;但本申请实施例并不限定于此。In S505, the first information includes cell switching rules, and the IAB host node 1 can control (or determine) the cell switching of the UE according to the cell switching rules. Wherein, the UE is in a connected state, and the cell currently accessed by the UE is the first cell. In addition, the IAB host node 1 controls the UE's cell switching, which can be understood as the IAB host node 1 triggers the UE to perform cell switching or does not trigger the UE to perform cell switching; or it can be understood as the IAB host node 1 initiating (or activating) the UE's cell switching or Cell switching of the UE is not initiated (or not activated); however, the embodiments of the present application are not limited to this.
作为一个示例,小区切换规则包括小区切换规则1,IAB宿主节点1根据小区切换规则1可以控制UE不进行小区切换。As an example, the cell switching rules include cell switching rule 1. According to the cell switching rule 1, the IAB host node 1 can control the UE not to perform cell switching.
作为又一个示例,小区切换规则包括小区切换规则2和小区切换规则3,IAB宿主节 点1可以接收来自UE的测量信息,该测量信息包括第一小区的信号强度,并根据该测量信息和小区切换规则控制UE的小区切换。例如,第一小区的信号强度大于或等于第一阈值,IAB宿主节点1可以根据小区切换规则2控制UE不进行小区切换。又例如,第一小区的信号强度小于或等于第二阈值,IAB宿主节点1可以根据小区切换规则3控制UE进行小区切换,如从第一小区切换至IAB节点2对应的小区。As yet another example, the cell switching rules include cell switching rule 2 and cell switching rule 3. The IAB host section Point 1 may receive measurement information from the UE, the measurement information including the signal strength of the first cell, and control the cell switching of the UE according to the measurement information and the cell switching rule. For example, if the signal strength of the first cell is greater than or equal to the first threshold, the IAB host node 1 may control the UE not to perform cell switching according to the cell switching rule 2. For another example, if the signal strength of the first cell is less than or equal to the second threshold, the IAB host node 1 can control the UE to perform cell switching according to the cell switching rule 3, such as switching from the first cell to the cell corresponding to the IAB node 2.
作为另一个示例,小区切换规则包括小区切换规则4,IAB宿主节点1可以确定UE与第一小区具有关联关系,并根据该关联关系和小区切换规则4控制UE不进行小区切换。例如,IAB宿主节点1可以根据来自AMF 2或UE的第二指示信息确定UE与第一小区具有关联关系,但本申请实施例并不限定于此。有关第二指示信息的描述请参考S503的相关内容,此处不再赘述。As another example, the cell switching rule includes cell switching rule 4. The IAB host node 1 can determine that the UE has an association relationship with the first cell, and control the UE not to perform cell switching based on the association relationship and the cell switching rule 4. For example, the IAB host node 1 may determine that the UE has an association relationship with the first cell based on the second indication information from the AMF 2 or the UE, but the embodiment of the present application is not limited thereto. For a description of the second instruction information, please refer to the relevant content of S503, which will not be described again here.
作为再一个示例,小区切换规则包括小区切换规则5和小区切换规则6,IAB宿主节点1可以确定UE与第一小区具有关联关系;IAB宿主节点1接收来自UE的测量信息,该测量信息包括第一小区的信号强度;以及,IAB宿主节点1根据该关联关系、测量信息以及小区切换规则控制UE的小区切换。例如,第一小区的信号强度大于或等于第五阈值,IAB宿主节点1可以根据UE与第一小区之间的关联关系和小区切换规则5控制UE不进行小区切换。又例如,第一小区的信号强度小于或等于第六阈值,IAB宿主节点1可以根据UE与第一小区之间的关联关系和小区切换规则6控制UE进行小区切换。其中,IAB宿主节点1可以根据来自AMF 2或UE的第二指示信息确定UE与第一小区具有关联关系,但本申请实施例并不限定于此。有关第二指示信息的描述请参考S503的相关内容,此处不再赘述。As another example, the cell switching rules include cell switching rule 5 and cell switching rule 6. The IAB host node 1 can determine that the UE has an association relationship with the first cell; the IAB host node 1 receives measurement information from the UE, and the measurement information includes the first cell. The signal strength of a cell; and, the IAB host node 1 controls the cell switching of the UE according to the association relationship, measurement information and cell switching rules. For example, if the signal strength of the first cell is greater than or equal to the fifth threshold, the IAB host node 1 may control the UE not to perform cell switching based on the association relationship between the UE and the first cell and the cell switching rule 5 . For another example, if the signal strength of the first cell is less than or equal to the sixth threshold, the IAB host node 1 may control the UE to perform cell switching based on the association relationship between the UE and the first cell and the cell switching rule 6 . The IAB host node 1 may determine that the UE has an association relationship with the first cell based on the second indication information from the AMF 2 or the UE, but the embodiment of the present application is not limited thereto. For a description of the second instruction information, please refer to the relevant content of S503, which will not be described again here.
S506:UE根据第一信息控制小区重选。S506: The UE controls cell reselection according to the first information.
S506为可选步骤。例如,UE接收到包括小区重选规则的第一信息,UE可以根据第一信息控制(或确定)小区重选。例如,UE根据小区重选规则控制小区重选。其中,UE控制小区重选,可理解为UE触发自身进行小区重选或不触发自身进行小区重选;或者可理解为UE发起(或激活)小区重选或不发起(或不激活)小区重选;但本申请实施例并不限定于此。S506 is an optional step. For example, the UE receives first information including cell reselection rules, and the UE can control (or determine) cell reselection according to the first information. For example, the UE controls cell reselection according to cell reselection rules. Among them, the UE controls cell reselection, which can be understood as the UE triggering itself to perform cell reselection or not triggering itself to perform cell reselection; or it can be understood as the UE initiating (or activating) cell reselection or not initiating (or inactivating) cell reselection. selection; however, the embodiments of the present application are not limited to this.
在一种可能的实现方式中,UE可以接收来自IAB宿主节点1的第一指示信息,该第一指示信息可用于指示第一小区的小区类型。例如,IAB宿主节点1可以广播第一指示信息,如将第一指示信息携带在系统信息中进行广播,相应地,UE接收来自IAB宿主节点1的第一指示信息。UE接收到第一指示信息后,可以根据该第一指示信息确定是否采用小区重选规则控制小区重选。其中,小区类型包括中继小区和非中继小区,有关小区类型的描述请参考前述描述,在此不再赘述。例如,第一小区的小区类型为中继小区,UE根据小区重选规则控制小区重选。又例如,第一小区的小区类型为非中继小区,UE根据信号强度控制小区重选。在本申请实施例中以第一小区的小区类型为中继小区为例进行描述。In a possible implementation manner, the UE may receive first indication information from the IAB host node 1, and the first indication information may be used to indicate the cell type of the first cell. For example, the IAB host node 1 can broadcast the first indication information, such as carrying the first indication information in the system information for broadcast. Correspondingly, the UE receives the first indication information from the IAB host node 1 . After receiving the first indication information, the UE may determine whether to use the cell reselection rule to control cell reselection based on the first indication information. The cell types include relay cells and non-relay cells. For descriptions of cell types, please refer to the foregoing description and will not be repeated here. For example, the cell type of the first cell is a relay cell, and the UE controls cell reselection according to the cell reselection rules. For another example, the cell type of the first cell is a non-relay cell, and the UE controls cell reselection based on signal strength. In this embodiment of the present application, the cell type of the first cell is a relay cell as an example for description.
作为一个示例,小区重选规则包括小区重选规则1,UE根据小区重选规则1可以确定不进行小区重选,即确定接入第一小区。As an example, the cell reselection rules include cell reselection rule 1. According to the cell reselection rule 1, the UE may determine not to perform cell reselection, that is, determine to access the first cell.
作为又一个示例,小区重选规则包括小区重选规则2和小区重选规则3,UE获取测量信息,该测量信息包括第一小区的信号强度,并根据该测量信息和小区重选规则控制小区重选。例如,第一小区的信号强度大于或等于第三阈值,UE可以根据小区重选规则2确定不进行小区重选,即确定接入第一小区。又例如,第一小区的信号强度小于或等于第四 阈值,UE可以根据小区重选规则3确定进行小区重选,如确定接入IAB节点2对应的小区。As another example, the cell reselection rules include cell reselection rule 2 and cell reselection rule 3. The UE obtains measurement information, which includes the signal strength of the first cell, and controls the cell according to the measurement information and the cell reselection rules. Reselect. For example, if the signal strength of the first cell is greater than or equal to the third threshold, the UE may determine not to perform cell reselection according to cell reselection rule 2, that is, determine to access the first cell. For another example, the signal strength of the first cell is less than or equal to the fourth cell threshold, the UE can determine to perform cell reselection according to cell reselection rule 3, such as determining to access the cell corresponding to IAB node 2.
作为另一个示例,小区重选规则包括小区重选规则4,UE可以确定UE与第一小区具有关联关系,并根据该关联关系和小区重选规则4确定不进行小区重选,即确定接入第一小区。例如,UE可以显示第一标识,并根据用户的操作指示确定UE与第一小区具有关联关系。又例如,UE可以根据第一标识和状态信息确定UE与第一小区具有关联关系。其中UE确定自身与第一小区具有关联关系的具体实现过程可参考步骤S503的相关内容,此处不再赘述。As another example, the cell reselection rules include cell reselection rule 4. The UE may determine that the UE has an association relationship with the first cell, and determine not to perform cell reselection based on the association relationship and the cell reselection rule 4, that is, determine access The first district. For example, the UE may display the first identification, and determine that the UE has an association relationship with the first cell according to the user's operation instructions. For another example, the UE may determine that the UE has an association relationship with the first cell according to the first identification and status information. For a specific implementation process in which the UE determines that it is associated with the first cell, reference may be made to the relevant content of step S503, which will not be described again here.
作为再一个示例,小区重选规则包括小区重选规则5和小区重选规则6,UE可以确定UE与第一小区具有关联关系;UE获取测量信息,该测量信息包括第一小区的信号强度;以及,UE根据该关联关系、测量信息以及小区重选规则控制小区重选。例如,第一小区的信号强度大于或等于第七阈值,UE可以根据UE与第一小区之间的关联关系和小区重选规则5确定UE不进行小区重选,即确定接入第一小区。又例如,第一小区的信号强度小于或等于第八阈值,UE可以根据UE与第一小区之间的关联关系和小区重选规则6控制UE进行小区重选,如确定接入IAB节点2对应的小区。其中,UE确定自身与第一小区具有关联关系的具体实现过程可参考步骤S503的相关内容,此处不再赘述。As another example, the cell reselection rules include cell reselection rule 5 and cell reselection rule 6. The UE can determine that the UE has an association relationship with the first cell; the UE obtains measurement information, and the measurement information includes the signal strength of the first cell; And, the UE controls cell reselection based on the association relationship, measurement information and cell reselection rules. For example, if the signal strength of the first cell is greater than or equal to the seventh threshold, the UE may determine not to perform cell reselection based on the association relationship between the UE and the first cell and the cell reselection rule 5, that is, determine to access the first cell. For another example, if the signal strength of the first cell is less than or equal to the eighth threshold, the UE may control the UE to perform cell reselection based on the association relationship between the UE and the first cell and the cell reselection rule 6, such as determining that the access IAB node 2 corresponds to community. The specific implementation process for the UE to determine that it is associated with the first cell can refer to the relevant content of step S503, which will not be described again here.
在本申请上述实施例中,IAB宿主节点1在确定UE是否进行小区切换时,增加了判断条件,能够减少终端设备的切换次数。并且,第一信息是与UE接入小区相关的信息,这样,IAB宿主节点1能够根据该第一信息准确地控制终端设备的小区切换,从而终端设备能够在适当的时机进行小区切换。另外,在IAB节点1与UE同步移动的过程中,IAB宿主节点1不再仅根据小区的信号强度频繁触发UE进行小区切换,即使存在其他的小区的信号强度高于第一小区的信号强度,IAB宿主节点1也需要考虑第一信息,如UE与当前接入的小区是否具有关联关系,来控制UE的小区切换,从而能够减少终端设备的切换次数,减少多次小区切换所产生的时延,以及提高终端设备通信的稳定性和用户体验。In the above embodiment of the present application, when determining whether the UE performs cell switching, the IAB host node 1 adds a judgment condition, which can reduce the number of switching times of the terminal device. Moreover, the first information is information related to the UE's access to the cell. In this way, the IAB host node 1 can accurately control the cell switching of the terminal device according to the first information, so that the terminal device can perform cell switching at an appropriate time. In addition, during the synchronous movement of the IAB node 1 and the UE, the IAB host node 1 no longer frequently triggers the UE to perform cell switching only based on the signal strength of the cell, even if there are other cells whose signal strengths are higher than the signal strength of the first cell. The IAB host node 1 also needs to consider the first information, such as whether the UE is associated with the currently accessed cell, to control the cell handover of the UE, thereby reducing the number of handovers of the terminal equipment and reducing the delay caused by multiple cell handovers. , and improve the stability and user experience of terminal device communication.
下面结合图7-8对图5所示的通信方法进行详细的描述。The communication method shown in Figure 5 will be described in detail below with reference to Figures 7-8.
图7为本申请实施例提供的通信方法的另一种流程示意图。在图7中,IAB宿主节点1根据UE通过IAB节点1接入第一小区为该UE配置第一信息。如图7所示,该方法可以包括如下内容。Figure 7 is another schematic flowchart of a communication method provided by an embodiment of the present application. In Figure 7, the IAB host node 1 configures the first information for the UE according to the UE accessing the first cell through the IAB node 1. As shown in Figure 7, the method may include the following content.
S701:IAB节点1与IAB宿主节点1建立连接。S701: IAB node 1 establishes a connection with IAB host node 1.
S702:UE通过IAB节点1与IAB宿主节点1建立连接。S702: The UE establishes a connection with the IAB host node 1 through the IAB node 1.
步骤S701和步骤S702的具体实现过程请分别参考S501、S502。通过上述步骤S701和步骤S702,UE接入第一小区,即通过IAB宿主节点1接入5GC。For the specific implementation processes of step S701 and step S702, please refer to S501 and S502 respectively. Through the above steps S701 and S702, the UE accesses the first cell, that is, accesses the 5GC through the IAB host node 1.
S703:UE向IAB宿主节点1发送第一小区的标识信息;相应地,IAB宿主节点1可以接收第一小区的标识信息。S703: The UE sends the identification information of the first cell to the IAB host node 1; accordingly, the IAB host node 1 can receive the identification information of the first cell.
S703为可选步骤。例如,UE可以在UE与IAB宿主节点1建立连接后,向IAB宿主节点发送第一小区的标识信息;也可以在UE与IAB宿主节点1建立连接的过程中,向IAB宿主节点发送第一小区的标识信息,本申请实施例对此不作限定。S703 is an optional step. For example, the UE may send the identification information of the first cell to the IAB host node after the UE establishes a connection with the IAB host node 1; it may also send the first cell identification information to the IAB host node during the process of the UE establishing a connection with the IAB host node 1. identification information, which is not limited in the embodiments of this application.
S704:IAB宿主节点1根据第一小区的标识信息确定UE是通过IAB节点1接入第一小区的UE。 S704: The IAB host node 1 determines that the UE is a UE that accesses the first cell through the IAB node 1 based on the identification information of the first cell.
S704为可选步骤。例如,IAB宿主节点1可以根据第一小区的标识信息确定UE是通过IAB节点1接入第一小区的终端设备,再为该UE配置第一信息;或者,也可以根据第一小区的标识信息为该UE配置第一信息,本申请实施例对此不作限定。S704 is an optional step. For example, the IAB host node 1 can determine that the UE is a terminal device that accesses the first cell through the IAB node 1 based on the identification information of the first cell, and then configure the first information for the UE; or, it can also determine based on the identification information of the first cell. The first information is configured for the UE, which is not limited in the embodiment of the present application.
S705:IAB宿主节点1确定第一信息。S705: IAB host node 1 determines the first information.
该第一信息包括小区切换规则,或包括小区重选规则,或包括小区切换规则和小区重选规则。例如,IAB宿主节点1可以为IAB节点1接入第一小区的UE配置如下规则中一种或多种:UE不进行小区切换;第一小区的信号强度大于或等于第一阈值,UE不进行小区切换;或者,第一小区的信号强度小于或等于第二阈值,UE进行小区切换。又例如,例如,IAB宿主节点1可以为IAB节点1接入第一小区的UE配置如下规则中一种或多种:UE不进行小区重选;第一小区的信号强度大于或等于第三阈值,UE不进行小区重选;或者,第一小区的信号强度小于或等于第四阈值,UE进行小区重选。其中S705的具体实现方式请参考S503的相关内容,此处不再赘述。为了便于介绍,图7以第一信息至少包括小区切换规则为例。The first information includes cell switching rules, or includes cell reselection rules, or includes cell switching rules and cell reselection rules. For example, the IAB host node 1 can configure one or more of the following rules for the UE that the IAB node 1 accesses the first cell: the UE does not perform cell switching; the signal strength of the first cell is greater than or equal to the first threshold, and the UE does not perform cell switching. Cell switching; or, the signal strength of the first cell is less than or equal to the second threshold, and the UE performs cell switching. For another example, the IAB host node 1 may configure one or more of the following rules for the UE of the IAB node 1 that accesses the first cell: the UE does not perform cell reselection; the signal strength of the first cell is greater than or equal to the third threshold. , the UE does not perform cell reselection; or, the signal strength of the first cell is less than or equal to the fourth threshold, and the UE performs cell reselection. For the specific implementation method of S705, please refer to the relevant content of S503 and will not be repeated here. For ease of introduction, FIG. 7 takes as an example that the first information at least includes cell switching rules.
可选地,该第一信息还可以包括第四指示信息,该第四指示信息指示非中继小区的小区切换规则。例如,该非中继小区的小区切换规则可以为根据小区的信号强度控制小区重选。Optionally, the first information may also include fourth indication information, the fourth indication information indicating the cell switching rule of the non-relay cell. For example, the cell switching rule of the non-relay cell may be to control cell reselection according to the signal strength of the cell.
S706:IAB宿主节点1向UE发送第一信息;相应地,UE接收第一信息。S706: The IAB host node 1 sends the first information to the UE; accordingly, the UE receives the first information.
S706为可选步骤。例如第一信息包括小区重选规则,IAB宿主节点1可以向UE发送该第一信息。可选地,该第一信息还可以包括第四指示信息。图7以IAB宿主节点1向UE发送小区重选规则为例。S706 is an optional step. For example, the first information includes cell reselection rules, and the IAB host node 1 may send the first information to the UE. Optionally, the first information may also include fourth indication information. Figure 7 takes the IAB host node 1 as an example to send cell reselection rules to the UE.
接下来分别从UE处于连接态和UE处于空闲态进行描述。其中S707、S708和S709是UE处于连接态所执行的内容。S710、S711和S712是UE处于空闲态所执行的内容。另外,S707、S708、S710、S711和S712为可选步骤。Next, descriptions will be given respectively when the UE is in the connected state and when the UE is in the idle state. Among them, S707, S708 and S709 are the contents executed by the UE in the connected state. S710, S711 and S712 are contents executed by the UE in the idle state. In addition, S707, S708, S710, S711 and S712 are optional steps.
S707:UE获取测量信息。S707: The UE obtains measurement information.
其中的测量信息包括第一小区的信号强度。例如,UE可以周期性或非周期性地测量第一小区的信号强度得到测量信息。The measurement information includes the signal strength of the first cell. For example, the UE may periodically or aperiodicly measure the signal strength of the first cell to obtain the measurement information.
S708:UE向IAB宿主节点1发送测量信息;相应地,IAB宿主节点1接收测量信息。S708: The UE sends measurement information to the IAB host node 1; accordingly, the IAB host node 1 receives the measurement information.
S709:IAB宿主节点1根据小区切换规则控制UE的小区切换。S709: The IAB host node 1 controls the cell switching of the UE according to the cell switching rules.
例如,IAB宿主节点1可以根据小区切换规则确定UE不进行小区切换;或者,IAB宿主节点1可以根据小区切换规则和测量信息确定不进行小区切换或进行小区切换,具体实现过程请参考S505所示的内容,在此不再赘述。For example, the IAB host node 1 can determine that the UE will not perform cell switching based on the cell switching rules; or, the IAB host node 1 can determine not to perform cell switching or perform cell switching based on the cell switching rules and measurement information. For the specific implementation process, please refer to S505. The contents will not be repeated here.
S710:IAB宿主节点1广播第一指示信息;相应地,UE接收第一指示信息。S710: IAB host node 1 broadcasts the first indication information; accordingly, the UE receives the first indication information.
在本实施例中,第一指示信息用于指示第一小区的小区类型为中继小区。In this embodiment, the first indication information is used to indicate that the cell type of the first cell is a relay cell.
S711:UE根据第一指示信息确定采用小区重选规则控制小区重选。S711: The UE determines to use the cell reselection rule to control cell reselection according to the first indication information.
例如,UE可以根据第一指示信息确定采用小区重选规则控制小区重选,或者,UE也可以根据第一指示信息和小区重选规则控制小区重选。For example, the UE may determine to use cell reselection rules to control cell reselection based on the first indication information, or the UE may also control cell reselection based on the first indication information and the cell reselection rules.
S712:UE根据小区重选规则控制UE的小区切换。S712: The UE controls the cell switching of the UE according to the cell reselection rules.
例如,UE可以根据小区重选规则确定UE不进行小区重选;或者,UE可以根据小区重选规则和测量信息确定不进行小区重选或进行小区重选,具体实现过程请参考S506所示的内容,在此不再赘述。 For example, the UE may determine not to perform cell reselection based on the cell reselection rules; or the UE may determine not to perform cell reselection or perform cell reselection based on the cell reselection rules and measurement information. For the specific implementation process, please refer to S506. The content will not be repeated here.
图8为本申请实施例提供的通信方法的又一种流程示意图。在图8中,IAB宿主节点1根据来自AMF 2的第二指示信息为UE确定第一信息。Figure 8 is another schematic flowchart of a communication method provided by an embodiment of the present application. In Figure 8, the IAB host node 1 determines the first information for the UE based on the second indication information from the AMF 2.
其中,S801、S802、S810-S814的具体实现过程与图7中的S701、S702、S706-S709、S712分别对应相似,不同之处在于:Among them, the specific implementation processes of S801, S802, and S810-S814 are similar to those of S701, S702, S706-S709, and S712 in Figure 7. The differences are:
S803:UE通过IAB宿主节点1向UE对应的AMF(即AMF 2)发送接入信息;相应地,AMF 2可以接收该接入信息。S803: The UE sends access information to the AMF corresponding to the UE (that is, AMF 2) through IAB host node 1; accordingly, AMF 2 can receive the access information.
其中的接入信息包括第一小区的标识信息和/或IAB节点1的标识信息。为了便于描述,本实施例以接入信息包括第一小区的标识信息为例进行描述。The access information includes the identification information of the first cell and/or the identification information of the IAB node 1 . For convenience of description, this embodiment is described by taking the access information including the identification information of the first cell as an example.
S804:AMF 2从UDM中获取第三信息。S804: AMF 2 obtains the third information from UDM.
该第三信息例如为UE的签约信息,该第三信息中包括与UE具有关联关系的一个或多个小区的标识信息,其中的一个或多个小区包括第一小区。The third information is, for example, the subscription information of the UE. The third information includes identification information of one or more cells that are associated with the UE, and one or more of the cells includes the first cell.
S805:AMF 2根据接入信息和第三信息确定UE与第一小区之间存在关联关系。S805: AMF 2 determines that there is an association relationship between the UE and the first cell based on the access information and the third information.
S806:AMF 2向IAB宿主节点1发送第二指示信息;相应地,IAB宿主节点1接收第二指示信息。该第二指示信息指示UE与第一小区具有关联关系。S806: AMF 2 sends the second indication information to the IAB host node 1; accordingly, the IAB host node 1 receives the second indication information. The second indication information indicates that the UE has an association relationship with the first cell.
S807:IAB宿主节点1根据第二指示信息确定第一信息。S807: The IAB host node 1 determines the first information based on the second indication information.
该第一信息包括小区切换规则,或包括小区重选规则,或包括小区切换规则和小区重选规则。例如,IAB宿主节点1根据第二指示信息可配置如下规则中的一种或多种:UE与第一小区具有关联关系,UE不进行小区切换;UE与第一小区具有关联关系,且第一小区的信号强度大于或等于第五阈值,UE不进行小区切换;或者,UE与第一小区具有关联关系,但第一小区的信号强度小于或等于第六阈值,UE进行小区切换。又例如,IAB宿主节点1根据第二指示信息可配置如下规则中的一种或多种:UE与第一小区具有关联关系,UE不进行小区重选;UE与第一小区具有关联关系,且第一小区的信号强度大于或等于第七阈值,UE不进行小区重选;或者,UE与第一小区具有关联关系,但第一小区的信号强度小于或等于第八阈值,UE进行小区重选。图8以第一信息包括小区切换规则和小区重选规则为例。The first information includes cell switching rules, or includes cell reselection rules, or includes cell switching rules and cell reselection rules. For example, the IAB host node 1 may configure one or more of the following rules according to the second indication information: the UE has an association relationship with the first cell, and the UE does not perform cell switching; the UE has an association relationship with the first cell, and the first cell If the signal strength of the cell is greater than or equal to the fifth threshold, the UE does not perform cell switching; or, the UE is associated with the first cell, but the signal strength of the first cell is less than or equal to the sixth threshold, and the UE performs cell switching. For another example, the IAB host node 1 may configure one or more of the following rules according to the second indication information: the UE has an association relationship with the first cell, and the UE does not perform cell reselection; the UE has an association relationship with the first cell, and If the signal strength of the first cell is greater than or equal to the seventh threshold, the UE does not perform cell reselection; or, the UE has an association relationship with the first cell, but the signal strength of the first cell is less than or equal to the eighth threshold, the UE performs cell reselection. . Figure 8 takes the example that the first information includes cell switching rules and cell reselection rules.
IAB节点1的移动触发IAB宿主节点切换,即执行S808的内容。The movement of IAB node 1 triggers the switching of the IAB host node, that is, the contents of S808 are executed.
S808:IAB节点1携带UE从IAB宿主节点1切换到IAB宿主节点2。S808: IAB node 1 carries the UE and switches from IAB host node 1 to IAB host node 2.
S809:IAB宿主节点1向IAB宿主节点2发送第一信息。相应地,IAB宿主节点2接收第一信息。S809: IAB host node 1 sends the first information to IAB host node 2. Correspondingly, IAB host node 2 receives the first information.
例如,IAB宿主节点1可以在IAB宿主节点切换完成后,向IAB宿主节点2发送第一信息,或者IAB宿主节点1可以在IAB宿主节点切换过程中,向IAB宿主节点2发送第一信息,如将第一信息携带在UE上下文中发送给IAB宿主节点2。For example, IAB host node 1 can send the first information to IAB host node 2 after the IAB host node switch is completed, or IAB host node 1 can send the first information to IAB host node 2 during the IAB host node switch process, such as The first information is carried in the UE context and sent to the IAB host node 2.
可选地,IAB宿主节点2接收到第一信息后,可以对第一信息进行重配置,或者也可以不对第一信息进行重配置,本实施例以IAB宿主节点2不对第一信息进行重配置为例。Optionally, after receiving the first information, the IAB host node 2 may reconfigure the first information, or may not reconfigure the first information. In this embodiment, the IAB host node 2 does not reconfigure the first information. For example.
图9为本申请实施例提供的通信方法的再一种流程示意图。在图9中,IAB宿主节点1根据来自UE的第二指示信息确定第一信息。Figure 9 is another schematic flowchart of a communication method provided by an embodiment of the present application. In Figure 9, the IAB host node 1 determines the first information based on the second indication information from the UE.
其中,S901、S902、S912-S916的具体实现过程与图8中的S801、S802、S810-S814分别对应相似,不同之处在于:如图9所示,该方法可以包括如下内容。Among them, the specific implementation process of S901, S902, and S912-S916 is similar to that of S801, S802, and S810-S814 in Figure 8. The difference is that, as shown in Figure 9, the method may include the following content.
S903:AMF 1确定第一小区的第一标识。 S903: AMF 1 determines the first identity of the first cell.
S903为可选步骤。该AMF 1是IAB节点1对应的AMF。例如,AMF 1可以接收来自第一小区对应的IAB节点1的IAB节点1的标识信息,根据该IAB节点1的标识信息为该第一小区配置第一标识;或者,AMF 1可以接收来自UDM或AF的第一标识。S903的具体实现过程请参考S501的相关内容,此处不再赘述。S903 is an optional step. The AMF 1 is the AMF corresponding to IAB node 1. For example, AMF 1 can receive the identification information of IAB node 1 from the IAB node 1 corresponding to the first cell, and configure the first identification for the first cell according to the identification information of the IAB node 1; or, AMF 1 can receive the identification information from UDM or The first logo of AF. For the specific implementation process of S903, please refer to the relevant content of S501 and will not be repeated here.
S904:AMF 1向IAB宿主节点1发送第一标识;相应地,IAB宿主节点1接收第一标识。S904为可选步骤。S904: AMF 1 sends the first identifier to IAB host node 1; accordingly, IAB host node 1 receives the first identifier. S904 is an optional step.
S905:IAB宿主节点1确定第一标识。S905: IAB host node 1 determines the first identifier.
例如,IAB宿主节点1可以根据IAB节点1的标识信息为IAB节点1对应的小区(即第一小区)配置第一标识。又例如,IAB宿主节点1可以接收来自AMF 1的第一标识。S905的具体实现过程请参考S501的相关内容,此处不再赘述。For example, the IAB host node 1 may configure a first identity for the cell corresponding to the IAB node 1 (ie, the first cell) according to the identity information of the IAB node 1 . As another example, IAB host node 1 may receive the first identity from AMF 1. For the specific implementation process of S905, please refer to the relevant content of S501 and will not be repeated here.
S906:IAB宿主节点1发送第一标识。相应地,UE接收第一标识。例如,IAB宿主节点1广播第一标识。S906: IAB host node 1 sends the first identifier. Correspondingly, the UE receives the first identification. For example, IAB host node 1 broadcasts the first identifier.
S907:UE显示第一标识,如图6A所示。S907: The UE displays the first identifier, as shown in Figure 6A.
S908:UE获取用户的操作指示。S908: The UE obtains the user's operation instructions.
其中的操作指示用于使得UE接入第一小区。The operation instructions are used to enable the UE to access the first cell.
S909:UE根据用户的操作指示确定UE与第一小区具有关联关系。S909: The UE determines that the UE has an association relationship with the first cell according to the user's operation instruction.
S910:UE向IAB宿主节点1发送第二指示信息;相应地,IAB宿主节点1接收第二指示信息。该第二指示信息指示UE与第一小区具有关联关系。S910: The UE sends the second indication information to the IAB host node 1; accordingly, the IAB host node 1 receives the second indication information. The second indication information indicates that the UE has an association relationship with the first cell.
S907-S910的具体实现过程请参考S503的相关内容,此处不再赘述。For the specific implementation process of S907-S910, please refer to the relevant content of S503 and will not be repeated here.
S911:IAB宿主节点1根据第二指示信息确定第一信息。S911: The IAB host node 1 determines the first information based on the second indication information.
例如,IAB宿主节点1根据UE与第一小区之间的关联关系可配置如下规则中的一种或多种:UE与第一小区具有关联关系,UE不进行小区切换;UE与第一小区具有关联关系,且第一小区的信号强度大于或等于第五阈值,UE不进行小区切换;或者,UE与第一小区具有关联关系,但第一小区的信号强度小于或等于第六阈值,UE进行小区切换。For example, the IAB host node 1 can configure one or more of the following rules according to the association relationship between the UE and the first cell: the UE has an association relationship with the first cell, and the UE does not perform cell switching; the UE has an association relationship with the first cell. If the UE has an association relationship with the first cell, but the signal strength of the first cell is less than or equal to the sixth threshold, the UE will not perform cell switching. Cell switching.
S917:UE解除与第一小区的关联关系。S917: The UE releases the association relationship with the first cell.
S917为可选步骤。例如,UE可以基于人机交互接口解除与第一小区之间的关联关系,如图6B所示。又例如,UE可以接收来自IAB宿主节点1的有关IAB节点1故障的指示信息,并根据该指示信息断开与第一小区之间的连接,以及解除与第一小区之间的关联关系。又例如,第一小区的信号强度不满足UE的通信要求,UE可以断开与第一小区之间的连接,并解除与第一小区之间的关联关系。再例如,UE可以根据自身与IAB节点1之间的位置关系,断开与第一小区之间的连接,并解除与第一小区之间的关联关系。例如,UE与IAB节点1之间的距离大于设定阈值,UE解除与第一小区之间的关联关系。应理解的是,UE还可以通过其它等效的方式解除与第一小区之间的关联关系,本申请实施例对此不作限定。S917 is an optional step. For example, the UE may cancel the association with the first cell based on the human-computer interaction interface, as shown in Figure 6B. For another example, the UE may receive indication information from the IAB host node 1 about the failure of the IAB node 1, and disconnect the connection with the first cell according to the indication information, and cancel the association with the first cell. For another example, if the signal strength of the first cell does not meet the communication requirements of the UE, the UE may disconnect from the first cell and terminate the association with the first cell. For another example, the UE may disconnect the connection with the first cell and cancel the association relationship with the first cell according to the positional relationship between the UE and the IAB node 1 . For example, if the distance between the UE and the IAB node 1 is greater than the set threshold, the UE releases the association relationship with the first cell. It should be understood that the UE can also cancel the association relationship with the first cell through other equivalent methods, which is not limited in this embodiment of the present application.
S918:UE向IAB宿主节点1发送第三指示信息;相应地,IAB宿主节点1接收第三指示信息。S918为可选步骤。该第三指示信息用于指示解除UE与第一小区的关联关系。S918: The UE sends the third indication information to the IAB host node 1; accordingly, the IAB host node 1 receives the third indication information. S918 is an optional step. The third indication information is used to instruct to release the association between the UE and the first cell.
S919:IAB宿主节点1根据第三指示信息解除UE与第一小区的关联关系。该S919为可选步骤。S919: The IAB host node 1 releases the association between the UE and the first cell according to the third indication information. This S919 is an optional step.
上述本申请提供的实施例中,分别从宿主无线接入节点、终端设备以及接入与移动性 管理功能网元之间交互的角度对本申请实施例提供的方法进行了介绍。为了实现上述本申请实施例提供的方法中的各功能,宿主无线接入节点、终端设备以及接入与移动性管理功能网元可以包括硬件结构和/或软件模块,以硬件结构、软件模块、或硬件结构加软件模块的形式来实现上述各功能。In the above embodiments provided by this application, the host wireless access node, terminal equipment, and access and mobility The method provided by the embodiment of this application is introduced from the perspective of interaction between management function network elements. In order to implement each function in the method provided by the above embodiments of the present application, the host wireless access node, terminal device, and access and mobility management functional network element may include hardware structures and/or software modules. In the form of hardware structures, software modules, Or in the form of hardware structure plus software modules to realize the above functions.
下面结合附图介绍本申请实施例中用来实现上述方法的通信装置。因此,上文中的内容均可以用于后续实施例中,重复的内容不再赘述。The communication device used to implement the above method in the embodiment of the present application will be introduced below with reference to the accompanying drawings. Therefore, the above content can be used in subsequent embodiments, and repeated content will not be described again.
图10示出了一种通信装置1000的结构示意图。该通信装置1000可以对应实现上述各个方法实施例中由宿主无线接入节点、终端设备或接入与移动性管理功能网元实现的功能或者步骤。该通信装置可以包括处理单元1010和收发单元1020。可选地,通信装置1000还可以包括存储单元(图10中未示出),该存储单元可以用于存储指令(代码或者程序)和/或数据。处理单元1010和收发单元1020可以与该存储单元耦合,例如,处理单元1010可以读取存储单元中的指令(代码或者程序)和/或数据,以实现相应的方法。上述各个单元可以独立设置,也可以部分或者全部集成。例如收发单元1020可包括发送单元和接收单元。Figure 10 shows a schematic structural diagram of a communication device 1000. The communication device 1000 can correspondingly implement the functions or steps implemented by the host wireless access node, the terminal device, or the access and mobility management function network element in each of the above method embodiments. The communication device may include a processing unit 1010 and a transceiver unit 1020. Optionally, the communication device 1000 may further include a storage unit (not shown in FIG. 10 ), which may be used to store instructions (codes or programs) and/or data. The processing unit 1010 and the transceiver unit 1020 can be coupled with the storage unit. For example, the processing unit 1010 can read the instructions (code or program) and/or data in the storage unit to implement the corresponding method. Each of the above units can be set up independently or partially or fully integrated. For example, the transceiver unit 1020 may include a sending unit and a receiving unit.
作为一个示例,通信装置1000可实现上述各个方法实施例中由宿主无线接入节点实现的功能或步骤。其中,处理单元1010可用于确定第一信息,所述第一信息是与终端设备接入小区相关的信息,其中,所述终端设备当前接入的小区是中继无线接入节点对应的第一小区,所述中继无线接入节点是所述宿主无线接入节点的子节点;以及根据所述第一信息控制所述终端设备的小区切换。As an example, the communication device 1000 can implement the functions or steps implemented by the host wireless access node in each of the above method embodiments. The processing unit 1010 may be used to determine the first information, which is information related to the terminal device accessing a cell, wherein the cell currently accessed by the terminal device is the first cell corresponding to the relay wireless access node. In a cell, the relay wireless access node is a child node of the host wireless access node; and controlling cell switching of the terminal device according to the first information.
在一种可选的实施方式中,该第一信息包括小区切换规则,该小区切换规则可以包括如下规则中的一种或多种:In an optional implementation, the first information includes cell switching rules, and the cell switching rules may include one or more of the following rules:
所述第一小区的信号强度大于或等于第一阈值,所述终端设备不进行小区切换;The signal strength of the first cell is greater than or equal to the first threshold, and the terminal device does not perform cell switching;
或者,所述第一小区的信号强度小于或等于第二阈值,所述终端设备进行小区切换;Alternatively, the signal strength of the first cell is less than or equal to the second threshold, and the terminal device performs cell switching;
或者,所述第一小区与所述终端设备具有关联关系,所述终端设备不进行小区切换。Alternatively, the first cell has an associated relationship with the terminal device, and the terminal device does not perform cell switching.
在一种可选的实施方式中,在根据所述第一信息控制所述终端设备的小区切换时,收发单元1020可用于接收来自所述终端设备的测量信息,所述测量信息包括所述第一小区的信号强度;处理单元1010可用于根据所述小区切换规则和所述第一小区的信号强度控制所述终端设备的小区切换。In an optional implementation, when controlling cell switching of the terminal device according to the first information, the transceiver unit 1020 may be configured to receive measurement information from the terminal device, where the measurement information includes the third The signal strength of a cell; the processing unit 1010 may be configured to control cell switching of the terminal device according to the cell switching rule and the signal strength of the first cell.
在一种可选的实施方式中,在根据所述第一信息控制所述终端设备的小区切换时,处理单元1010,可用于确定所述终端设备与所述第一小区具有关联关系;以及根据所述小区切换规则和所述关联关系,确定所述终端设备不进行小区切换。In an optional implementation, when controlling the cell switching of the terminal device according to the first information, the processing unit 1010 may be configured to determine that the terminal device has an association relationship with the first cell; and according to The cell switching rule and the association relationship determine that the terminal device does not perform cell switching.
在一种可选的实施方式中,收发单元1020进一步用于向所述终端设备发送所述第一信息。In an optional implementation, the transceiving unit 1020 is further configured to send the first information to the terminal device.
在一种可选的实施方式中,所述第一信息包括小区重选规则,所述小区重选规则包括如下规则中的一种或多种:In an optional implementation, the first information includes cell reselection rules, and the cell reselection rules include one or more of the following rules:
所述第一小区的信号强度大于或等于第三阈值,所述终端设备不进行小区重选;The signal strength of the first cell is greater than or equal to the third threshold, and the terminal device does not perform cell reselection;
或者,所述第一小区的信号强度小于或等于第四阈值,所述终端设备进行小区重选;Alternatively, the signal strength of the first cell is less than or equal to the fourth threshold, and the terminal device performs cell reselection;
或者,所述第一小区与所述终端设备具有关联关系,所述终端设备不进行小区重选。Alternatively, the first cell has an associated relationship with the terminal device, and the terminal device does not perform cell reselection.
在一种可选的实施方式中,收发单元1020进一步用于发送第一指示信息,其中,所述第一指示信息指示所述第一小区的小区类型为中继小区。 In an optional implementation, the transceiver unit 1020 is further configured to send first indication information, wherein the first indication information indicates that the cell type of the first cell is a relay cell.
在一种可选的实施方式中,处理单元1010进一步用于确定所述第一小区的第一标识,其中,所述第一标识用于所述终端设备接入所述第一小区;收发单元1020进一步用于向所述终端设备发送所述第一标识。In an optional implementation, the processing unit 1010 is further configured to determine a first identity of the first cell, where the first identity is used for the terminal device to access the first cell; a transceiver unit 1020 is further used to send the first identification to the terminal device.
在一种可选的实施方式中,在确定所述第一小区的第一标识时,收发单元1020可用于接收来自接入与移动性管理功能网元的所述第一标识。In an optional implementation, when determining the first identity of the first cell, the transceiver unit 1020 may be configured to receive the first identity from the access and mobility management function network element.
在一种可选的实施方式中,在确定第一信息时,收发单元1020可用于接收来自接入与移动性管理功能网元或所述终端设备的第二指示信息,其中,所述第二指示信息指示所述终端设备与所述第一小区具有关联关系;处理单元1010可用于根据所述第二指示信息确定所述第一信息。In an optional implementation, when determining the first information, the transceiver unit 1020 may be configured to receive second indication information from the access and mobility management function network element or the terminal device, wherein the second The indication information indicates that the terminal device has an association relationship with the first cell; the processing unit 1010 may be configured to determine the first information according to the second indication information.
作为又一个示例,通信装置1000可实现上述各个方法实施例中由终端设备实现的功能或步骤。其中,收发单元1020可用于接收来自宿主无线接入节点的第一信息,所述第一信息是与终端设备接入小区相关的信息,其中,所述终端设备当前接入的小区是中继无线接入节点对应的第一小区,所述中继无线接入节点是所述宿主无线接入节点的子节点。处理单元1010可用于根据所述第一信息控制所述终端设备的小区重选。As yet another example, the communication device 1000 can implement the functions or steps implemented by the terminal device in each of the above method embodiments. The transceiver unit 1020 may be configured to receive first information from the host wireless access node, where the first information is information related to a terminal device accessing a cell, wherein the cell currently accessed by the terminal device is a relay wireless access node. The first cell corresponding to the access node, the relay wireless access node is a child node of the host wireless access node. The processing unit 1010 may be configured to control cell reselection of the terminal device according to the first information.
在一种可选的实施方式中,所述第一信息包括小区重选规则,所述小区重选规则包括如下规则中的一种或多种:In an optional implementation, the first information includes cell reselection rules, and the cell reselection rules include one or more of the following rules:
所述第一小区的信号强度大于或等于第三阈值,所述终端设备不进行小区重选;The signal strength of the first cell is greater than or equal to the third threshold, and the terminal device does not perform cell reselection;
或者,所述第一小区的信号强度小于或等于第四阈值,所述终端设备进行小区重选;Alternatively, the signal strength of the first cell is less than or equal to the fourth threshold, and the terminal device performs cell reselection;
或者,所述第一小区与所述终端设备具有关联关系,所述终端设备不进行小区重选。Alternatively, the first cell has an associated relationship with the terminal device, and the terminal device does not perform cell reselection.
在一种可选的实施方式中,在根据所述第一信息控制所述终端设备的小区重选时,处理单元1010可用于确定测量信息,所述测量信息包括所述第一小区的信号强度;以及,根据所述小区重选规则和所述第一小区的信号强度控制所述终端设备的小区重选。In an optional implementation, when controlling cell reselection of the terminal device according to the first information, the processing unit 1010 may be used to determine measurement information, where the measurement information includes the signal strength of the first cell. ; and, controlling cell reselection of the terminal device according to the cell reselection rule and the signal strength of the first cell.
在一种可选的实施方式中,在根据所述第一信息控制所述终端设备的小区重选时,处理单元1010可用于确定所述终端设备与所述第一小区具有关联关系;以及,根据所述小区重选规则和所述关联关系,确定不进行小区重选。In an optional implementation, when controlling cell reselection of the terminal device according to the first information, the processing unit 1010 may be used to determine that the terminal device has an association relationship with the first cell; and, According to the cell reselection rule and the association relationship, it is determined not to perform cell reselection.
在一种可选的实施方式中,收发单元1020可用于接收来自所述宿主无线接入节点的第一指示信息,其中,所述第一指示信息指示所述第一小区的小区类型为中继小区。In an optional implementation, the transceiver unit 1020 may be configured to receive first indication information from the host wireless access node, wherein the first indication information indicates that the cell type of the first cell is relay. community.
在一种可选的实施方式中,收发单元1020进一步用于接收来自所述宿主无线接入节点的所述第一小区的第一标识;处理单元1010进一步用于根据所述第一标识接入所述第一小区。In an optional implementation, the transceiving unit 1020 is further configured to receive a first identity of the first cell from the host wireless access node; the processing unit 1010 is further configured to access according to the first identity. The first cell.
在一种可选的实施方式中,收发单元1020进一步用于向所述宿主无线接入节点发送第二指示信息,所述第二指示信息指示所述终端设备与所述第一小区具有关联关系。In an optional implementation, the transceiver unit 1020 is further configured to send second indication information to the host wireless access node, where the second indication information indicates that the terminal device has an association relationship with the first cell. .
在一种可选的实施方式中,处理单元1010进一步用于根据所述第一标识和状态信息,确定所述终端设备与所述第一小区具有关联关系,其中,所述状态信息包括所述终端设备的位置信息和/或所述终端设备与所述中继无线接入节点之间的位置关系。In an optional implementation, the processing unit 1010 is further configured to determine that the terminal device has an association relationship with the first cell according to the first identification and status information, wherein the status information includes the Location information of the terminal device and/or the location relationship between the terminal device and the relay wireless access node.
作为再一个示例,通信装置1000可实现上述各个方法实施例中由接入与移动性管理功能网元实现的功能或步骤。其中,处理单元1010可用于确定第二信息,所述第二信息用于终端设备接入小区;其中,所述第二信息包括第一小区的第一标识和/或指示所述终端设备与第一小区具有关联关系,所述第一小区是所述终端设备当前接入的小区,所述第一小区对应于中继无线接入节点,所述中继无线接入节点是宿主无线接入节点的子节点;收 发单元1020可用于向所述宿主无线接入节点发送所述第二信息。As another example, the communication device 1000 can implement the functions or steps implemented by the access and mobility management function network element in each of the above method embodiments. Wherein, the processing unit 1010 may be used to determine second information, the second information is used for the terminal device to access the cell; wherein the second information includes a first identification of the first cell and/or indicates that the terminal device is connected to the first cell. A cell has an association relationship, the first cell is a cell currently accessed by the terminal device, the first cell corresponds to a relay wireless access node, and the relay wireless access node is a host wireless access node. child node; collect The sending unit 1020 may be configured to send the second information to the host wireless access node.
在一种可选的实施方式中,在确定第二信息时,收发单元1020可用于接收来自统一数据管理功能网元或者应用功能网元的所述第一标识。In an optional implementation, when determining the second information, the transceiver unit 1020 may be configured to receive the first identification from the unified data management function network element or the application function network element.
在一种可选的实施方式中,在确定第二信息时,收发单元1020可用于接收来自UE的接入信息,所述接入信息包括所述第一小区的标识信息;以及,接收来自统一数据管理功能网元的第三信息,第三信息包括与UE具有关联关系的一个或多个小区的标识信息,所述一个或多个小区包括第一小区;处理单元1010可用于根据所述接入信息和所述第三信息,确定所述UE与所述第一小区具有关联关系。In an optional implementation, when determining the second information, the transceiver unit 1020 may be configured to receive access information from the UE, where the access information includes identification information of the first cell; and, receive access information from the unified The third information of the data management function network element, the third information includes identification information of one or more cells that have an association relationship with the UE, and the one or more cells include the first cell; the processing unit 1010 may be configured to perform the processing according to the connection The input information and the third information are used to determine that the UE has an association relationship with the first cell.
有关上述处理单元1010和收发单元1020更详细的描述可以直接参考图5、图7、图8或图9所示的方法实施例中相关描述直接得到,这里不加赘述。More detailed descriptions about the processing unit 1010 and the transceiver unit 1020 can be obtained directly by referring to the relevant descriptions in the method embodiments shown in Figure 5, Figure 7, Figure 8 or Figure 9, and will not be described again here.
如图11所示为本申请实施例提供的通信装置1100,其中,通信装置1100可以是IAB宿主节点1,能够实现本申请实施例提供的方法中宿主无线接入节点功能,或者,通信装置1100可以是终端设备,能够实现本申请实施例提供的方法中终端设备的功能,或者,通信装置1100可以是接入与移动性管理功能网元,能够实现本申请实施例提供的方法中接入与移动性管理功能网元的功能;或者,通信装置1100也可以是能够支持源宿主无线接入节点实现本申请实施例提供的方法中对应的功能的装置,或者能够支持终端设备实现本申请实施例提供的方法中对应的功能的装置,或者能够支持接入与移动性管理功能网元实现本申请实施例提供的方法中对应的功能的装置。其中,该通信装置1100可以为芯片系统。本申请实施例中,芯片系统可以由芯片构成,也可以包含芯片和其他分立器件。Figure 11 shows a communication device 1100 provided by an embodiment of the present application. The communication device 1100 may be an IAB host node 1, capable of implementing the host wireless access node function in the method provided by an embodiment of the present application, or the communication device 1100 It may be a terminal device, capable of realizing the functions of the terminal device in the method provided by the embodiments of this application, or the communication device 1100 may be an access and mobility management functional network element, capable of realizing the access and mobility management functions of the method provided by the embodiments of this application. The function of the mobility management function network element; or, the communication device 1100 can also be a device that can support the source host wireless access node to implement the corresponding functions in the method provided by the embodiment of the present application, or can support the terminal device to implement the embodiment of the present application. Devices with corresponding functions in the methods provided, or devices that can support access and mobility management function network elements to implement corresponding functions in the methods provided in the embodiments of this application. The communication device 1100 may be a chip system. In the embodiments of this application, the chip system may be composed of chips, or may include chips and other discrete devices.
在硬件实现上,上述收发单元1020可以为收发器,收发器集成在通信装置1100中构成通信接口1110。In terms of hardware implementation, the above-mentioned transceiver unit 1020 may be a transceiver, and the transceiver is integrated in the communication device 1100 to form the communication interface 1110.
通信装置1100包括至少一个处理器1120,用于实现或用于支持通信装置1100实现本申请实施例提供的方法中宿主无线接入节点、终端设备或接入与移动性管理功能网元的功能。具体参见方法示例中的详细描述,此处不做赘述。The communication device 1100 includes at least one processor 1120, which is used to implement or support the communication device 1100 to implement the functions of hosting a wireless access node, a terminal device, or an access and mobility management function network element in the method provided by the embodiments of this application. For details, please refer to the detailed description in the method example and will not be repeated here.
通信装置1100还可以包括至少一个存储器1130,用于存储程序指令和/或数据。存储器1130和处理器1120耦合。本申请实施例中的耦合是装置、单元或模块之间的间接耦合或通信连接,可以是电性,机械或其它的形式,用于装置、单元或模块之间的信息交互。处理器1120可能和存储器1130协同操作。处理器1120可能执行存储器1130中存储的程序指令和/或数据,以使得通信装置1100实现相应的方法。所述至少一个存储器中的至少一个可以包括于处理器中。Communication device 1100 may also include at least one memory 1130 for storing program instructions and/or data. Memory 1130 and processor 1120 are coupled. The coupling in the embodiment of this application is an indirect coupling or communication connection between devices, units or modules, which may be in electrical, mechanical or other forms, and is used for information interaction between devices, units or modules. The processor 1120 may cooperate with the memory 1130. The processor 1120 may execute program instructions and/or data stored in the memory 1130, so that the communication device 1100 implements the corresponding method. At least one of the at least one memory may be included in the processor.
通信装置1100还可以包括通信接口1110,用于通过传输介质和其它设备进行通信,从而用于通信装置1100中的装置可以和其它设备进行通信。示例性地,当该通信装置为宿主无线接入节点时,该其它设备为终端设备或接入与移动性管理功能网元;或者,当该通信装置为终端设备时,该其它设备为宿主无线接入节点或接入与移动性管理功能网元;或者,当该通信装置为接入与移动性管理功能网元时,该其它设备为终端设备或宿主无线接入节点。处理器1120可以利用通信接口1110收发数据。通信接口1110具体可以是收发器。The communication device 1100 may also include a communication interface 1110 for communicating with other devices through a transmission medium, so that the devices used in the communication device 1100 can communicate with other devices. For example, when the communication device is a host wireless access node, the other device is a terminal device or an access and mobility management function network element; or, when the communication device is a terminal device, the other device is a host wireless access node. An access node or an access and mobility management function network element; or, when the communication device is an access and mobility management function network element, the other device is a terminal device or a host wireless access node. Processor 1120 may utilize communication interface 1110 to send and receive data. The communication interface 1110 may specifically be a transceiver.
本申请实施例中不限定上述通信接口1110、处理器1120以及存储器1130之间的具体连接介质。本申请实施例在图11中以存储器1130、处理器1120以及通信接口1110之间通过总线1100连接,总线1140在图11中以粗线表示,其它部件之间的连接方式,仅是进行示意性说明,并不引以为限。所述总线可以分为地址总线、数据总线、控制总线等。为 便于表示,图11中仅用一条粗线表示,但并不表示仅有一根总线或一种类型的总线。The embodiment of the present application does not limit the specific connection medium between the communication interface 1110, the processor 1120, and the memory 1130. In the embodiment of the present application, the memory 1130, the processor 1120 and the communication interface 1110 are connected through a bus 1100 in Figure 11. The bus 1140 is represented by a thick line in Figure 11. The connection between other components is only schematic. Description, not limitative. The bus can be divided into address bus, data bus, control bus, etc. for For ease of presentation, only one thick line is used in Figure 11, but it does not mean that there is only one bus or one type of bus.
在本申请实施例中,处理器1120可以是通用处理器、数字信号处理器、专用集成电路、现场可编程门阵列或者其他可编程逻辑器件、分立门或者晶体管逻辑器件、分立硬件组件,可以实现或者执行本申请实施例中的公开的各方法、步骤及逻辑框图。通用处理器可以是微处理器或者任何常规的处理器等。结合本申请实施例所公开的方法的步骤可以直接体现为硬件处理器执行完成,或者用处理器中的硬件及软件模块组合执行完成。In this embodiment of the present application, the processor 1120 may be a general processor, a digital signal processor, an application specific integrated circuit, a field programmable gate array or other programmable logic device, a discrete gate or transistor logic device, or a discrete hardware component, which can be implemented Or execute the disclosed methods, steps and logical block diagrams in the embodiments of this application. A general-purpose processor may be a microprocessor or any conventional processor, etc. The steps of the methods disclosed in conjunction with the embodiments of the present application can be directly implemented by a hardware processor for execution, or can be executed by a combination of hardware and software modules in the processor.
在本申请实施例中,存储器1130可以是非易失性存储器,比如硬盘(hard disk drive,HDD)或固态硬盘(solid-state drive,SSD)等,还可以是易失性存储器(volatile memory),例如随机存取存储器(random-access memory,RAM)。存储器是能够用于携带或存储具有指令或数据结构形式的期望的程序代码并能够由计算机存取的任何其他介质,但不限于此。本申请实施例中的存储器还可以是电路或者其它任意能够实现存储功能的装置,用于存储程序指令和/或数据。In this embodiment of the present application, the memory 1130 may be a non-volatile memory, such as a hard disk drive (HDD) or a solid-state drive (SSD), etc., or it may be a volatile memory (volatile memory). For example, random-access memory (RAM). Memory is, but is not limited to, any other medium that can be used to carry or store desired program code in the form of instructions or data structures and that can be accessed by a computer. The memory in the embodiment of the present application can also be a circuit or any other device capable of realizing a storage function, used to store program instructions and/or data.
应理解,通信装置1100为宿主无线接入节点时,图12示出了通信装置1100的另一种形式。图12中,通信装置1200是宿主无线接入节点,应理解,宿主无线接入节点包括CU和DU,CU可包括通信接口、处理器以及存储器,以及连接通信接口、处理器以及存储器的总线,其中通信接口可用于与另一宿主无线接入节点的CU或IAB节点的DU进行通信。DU也可包括通信接口、处理器以及存储器,以及连接通信接口、处理器以及存储器的总线,其中通信接口用于与IAB节点的MT进行通信。It should be understood that when the communication device 1100 is a host wireless access node, FIG. 12 shows another form of the communication device 1100. In Figure 12, the communication device 1200 is a host wireless access node. It should be understood that the host wireless access node includes CU and DU. The CU may include a communication interface, a processor, and a memory, as well as a bus connecting the communication interface, the processor, and the memory. The communication interface may be used to communicate with a CU of another host wireless access node or a DU of an IAB node. The DU may also include a communication interface, a processor and a memory, and a bus connecting the communication interface, the processor and the memory, where the communication interface is used to communicate with the MT of the IAB node.
图13示出了一种通信装置的另一种形式。便于理解和图示方便,图13中,通信装置1300是宿主无线接入节点的另一个示例。该通信装置1300可应用于如图2或图3所示的系统中,可以为图2或图3中的IAB宿主节点,执行上述方法实施例中宿主无线接入节点的功能。通信装置1300可包括一个或多个射频单元,如远端射频单元(remote radio unit,RRU)1310和一个或多个基带单元(baseband unit,BBU)(也可称为数字单元,digital unit,DU)1320。所述RRU 1310可以称为通信模块,与图10中的收发单元1020对应,可选地,该通信模块还可以称为收发机、收发电路、或者收发器等等,其可以包括至少一个天线1311和射频单元1312。所述RRU 1310部分主要用于射频信号的收发以及射频信号与基带信号的转换。所述BBU 1320部分主要用于进行基带处理,对基站进行控制等。所述RRU 1310与BBU 1320可以是物理上设置在一起,也可以物理上分离设置的,即分布式基站。Figure 13 shows another form of a communication device. For ease of understanding and illustration, in Figure 13, the communication device 1300 is another example of a host wireless access node. The communication device 1300 can be applied in the system shown in Figure 2 or Figure 3, and can be the IAB host node in Figure 2 or Figure 3, performing the functions of the host wireless access node in the above method embodiment. The communication device 1300 may include one or more radio frequency units, such as a remote radio unit (RRU) 1310 and one or more baseband units (BBU) (also called a digital unit, DU). )1320. The RRU 1310 can be called a communication module, corresponding to the transceiver unit 1020 in Figure 10. Optionally, the communication module can also be called a transceiver, a transceiver circuit, or a transceiver, etc., and it can include at least one antenna 1311 and radio frequency unit 1312. The RRU 1310 part is mainly used for transmitting and receiving radio frequency signals and converting radio frequency signals and baseband signals. The BBU 1320 part is mainly used for baseband processing, base station control, etc. The RRU 1310 and the BBU 1320 may be physically installed together or physically separated, that is, a distributed base station.
所述BBU 1320为基站的控制中心,也可以称为处理模块,可以与图10中的处理单元1010对应,主要用于完成基带处理功能,如信道编码,复用,调制,扩频等等。例如所述BBU(处理模块)可以用于控制基站执行上述方法实施例中关于网络设备的操作流程,例如,生成上述指示信息等。The BBU 1320 is the control center of the base station, which can also be called a processing module. It can correspond to the processing unit 1010 in Figure 10 and is mainly used to complete baseband processing functions, such as channel coding, multiplexing, modulation, spread spectrum, etc. For example, the BBU (processing module) can be used to control the base station to execute the operation process of the network device in the above method embodiment, for example, generate the above indication information, etc.
在一个示例中,所述BBU 1320可以由一个或多个单板构成,多个单板可以共同支持单一接入制式的无线接入网(如LTE网),也可以分别支持不同接入制式的无线接入网(如LTE网,5G网或其他网)。所述BBU 1320还包括存储器1321和处理器1322。所述存储器1321用以存储必要的指令和数据。所述处理器1322用于控制基站进行必要的动作,例如用于控制基站执行上述方法实施例中关于宿主无线接入节点的操作流程。所述存储器1321和处理器1322可以服务于一个或多个单板。也就是说,可以每个单板上单独设置存储器和处理器。也可以是多个单板共用相同的存储器和处理器。此外每个单板上还可以设置有必要的电路。 In one example, the BBU 1320 may be composed of one or more single boards. Multiple single boards may jointly support a single access standard wireless access network (such as an LTE network), or may respectively support different access standard wireless access networks. Wireless access network (such as LTE network, 5G network or other networks). The BBU 1320 also includes a memory 1321 and a processor 1322. The memory 1321 is used to store necessary instructions and data. The processor 1322 is used to control the base station to perform necessary actions, for example, to control the base station to perform the operation process of the host wireless access node in the above method embodiment. The memory 1321 and processor 1322 may serve one or more single boards. In other words, the memory and processor can be set independently on each board. It is also possible for multiple boards to share the same memory and processor. In addition, necessary circuits can also be installed on each board.
本申请实施例还提供一种通信系统,具体的,通信系统包括宿主无线接入节点、终端设备或接入与移动性管理功能网元中的至少一个。Embodiments of the present application also provide a communication system. Specifically, the communication system includes at least one of a host wireless access node, a terminal device, or an access and mobility management functional network element.
本申请实施例中还提供一种计算机可读存储介质,包括指令,当其在计算机上运行时,使得计算机执行上述各个实施例中的方法。An embodiment of the present application also provides a computer-readable storage medium, which includes instructions that, when run on a computer, cause the computer to execute the methods in each of the above embodiments.
本申请实施例中还提供一种计算机程序产品,包括指令,当其在计算机上运行时,使得计算机执行上述各个实施例中的方法。An embodiment of the present application also provides a computer program product, which includes instructions that, when run on a computer, cause the computer to execute the methods in each of the above embodiments.
本申请实施例提供了一种芯片系统,该芯片系统包括处理器,还可以包括存储器,用于实现前述方法中宿主无线接入节点、终端设备或接入与移动性管理功能网元的功能。该芯片系统可以由芯片构成,也可以包含芯片和其他分立器件。Embodiments of the present application provide a chip system. The chip system includes a processor and may also include a memory, which is used to implement the functions of a host wireless access node, a terminal device, or an access and mobility management function network element in the foregoing method. The chip system can be composed of chips or include chips and other discrete devices.
应理解,在本申请的各种实施例中,上述各过程的序号的大小并不意味着执行顺序的先后,各过程的执行顺序应以其功能和内在逻辑确定,而不应对本申请实施例的实施过程构成任何限定。It should be understood that in the various embodiments of the present application, the size of the sequence numbers of the above-mentioned processes does not mean the order of execution. The execution order of each process should be determined by its functions and internal logic, and should not be used in the embodiments of the present application. The implementation process constitutes any limitation.
本领域普通技术人员可以意识到,结合本文中所公开的实施例描述的各示例的单元及算法步骤,能够以电子硬件、或者计算机软件和电子硬件的结合来实现。这些功能究竟以硬件还是软件方式来执行,取决于技术方案的特定应用和设计约束条件。专业技术人员可以对每个特定的应用来使用不同方法来实现所描述的功能,但是这种实现不应认为超出本申请的范围。Those of ordinary skill in the art will appreciate that the units and algorithm steps of each example described in conjunction with the embodiments disclosed herein can be implemented with electronic hardware, or a combination of computer software and electronic hardware. Whether these functions are performed in hardware or software depends on the specific application and design constraints of the technical solution. Skilled artisans may implement the described functionality using different methods for each specific application, but such implementations should not be considered beyond the scope of this application.
所属领域的技术人员可以清楚地了解到,为描述的方便和简洁,上述描述的系统、装置和单元的具体工作过程,可以参考前述方法实施例中的对应过程,在此不再赘述。Those skilled in the art can clearly understand that for the convenience and simplicity of description, the specific working processes of the systems, devices and units described above can be referred to the corresponding processes in the foregoing method embodiments, and will not be described again here.
在本申请所提供的几个实施例中,应该理解到,所揭露的系统、装置和方法,可以通过其它的方式实现。例如,以上所描述的装置实施例仅仅是示意性的,例如,所述单元的划分,仅仅为一种逻辑功能划分,实际实现时可以有另外的划分方式,例如多个单元或组件可以结合或者可以集成到另一个系统,或一些特征可以忽略,或不执行。另一点,所显示或讨论的相互之间的耦合或直接耦合或通信连接可以是通过一些接口,装置或单元的间接耦合或通信连接,可以是电性,机械或其它的形式。In the several embodiments provided in this application, it should be understood that the disclosed systems, devices and methods can be implemented in other ways. For example, the device embodiments described above are only illustrative. For example, the division of the units is only a logical function division. In actual implementation, there may be other division methods. For example, multiple units or components may be combined or can be integrated into another system, or some features can be ignored, or not implemented. On the other hand, the coupling or direct coupling or communication connection between each other shown or discussed may be through some interfaces, and the indirect coupling or communication connection of the devices or units may be in electrical, mechanical or other forms.
所述作为分离部件说明的单元可以是或者也可以不是物理上分开的,作为单元显示的部件可以是或者也可以不是物理单元,即可以位于一个地方,或者也可以分布到多个网络单元上。可以根据实际的需要选择其中的部分或者全部单元来实现本实施例方案的目的。The units described as separate components may or may not be physically separated, and the components shown as units may or may not be physical units, that is, they may be located in one place, or they may be distributed to multiple network units. Some or all of the units can be selected according to actual needs to achieve the purpose of the solution of this embodiment.
另外,在本申请各个实施例中的各功能单元可以集成在一个处理单元中,也可以是各个单元单独物理存在,也可以两个或两个以上单元集成在一个单元中。In addition, each functional unit in each embodiment of the present application can be integrated into one processing unit, each unit can exist physically alone, or two or more units can be integrated into one unit.
所述功能如果以软件功能单元的形式实现并作为独立的产品销售或使用时,可以存储在一个计算机可读取存储介质中。基于这样的理解,本申请的技术方案本质上或者说对现有技术做出贡献的部分或者该技术方案的部分可以以软件产品的形式体现出来,该计算机软件产品存储在一个存储介质中,包括若干指令用以使得一台计算机设备(可以是个人计算机,服务器,或者网络设备等)执行本申请各个实施例所述方法的全部或部分步骤。而前述的存储介质包括:U盘、移动硬盘、只读存储器(read-only memory,ROM)、随机存取存储器(random access memory,RAM)、磁碟或者光盘等各种可以存储程序代码的介质。If the functions are implemented in the form of software functional units and sold or used as independent products, they can be stored in a computer-readable storage medium. Based on this understanding, the technical solution of the present application is essentially or the part that contributes to the existing technology or the part of the technical solution can be embodied in the form of a software product. The computer software product is stored in a storage medium, including Several instructions are used to cause a computer device (which may be a personal computer, a server, or a network device, etc.) to execute all or part of the steps of the methods described in various embodiments of this application. The aforementioned storage media include: U disk, mobile hard disk, read-only memory (ROM), random access memory (RAM), magnetic disk or optical disk and other media that can store program code. .
以上所述,仅为本申请的具体实施方式,但本申请实施例的保护范围并不局限于此,任何熟悉本技术领域的技术人员在本申请实施例揭露的技术范围内,可轻易想到变化或替换,都应涵盖在本申请实施例的保护范围之内。因此,本申请实施例的保护范围应所述以 权利要求的保护范围为准。 The above are only specific implementation modes of the present application, but the protection scope of the embodiments of the present application is not limited thereto. Any person familiar with the technical field can easily think of changes within the technical scope disclosed in the embodiments of the present application. or replacement, all should be covered by the protection scope of the embodiments of this application. Therefore, the protection scope of the embodiments of the present application should be described as The scope of protection of the claims shall prevail.

Claims (47)

  1. 一种通信方法,其特征在于,所述方法包括:A communication method, characterized in that the method includes:
    宿主无线接入节点确定第一信息,所述第一信息是与终端设备接入小区相关的信息,其中,所述终端设备当前接入的小区是中继无线接入节点对应的第一小区,所述中继无线接入节点是所述宿主无线接入节点的子节点;The host wireless access node determines first information, where the first information is information related to the terminal device accessing a cell, where the cell currently accessed by the terminal device is the first cell corresponding to the relay wireless access node, The relay wireless access node is a child node of the host wireless access node;
    所述宿主无线接入节点根据所述第一信息控制所述终端设备的小区切换。The host wireless access node controls cell switching of the terminal device according to the first information.
  2. 根据权利要求1所述的方法,其特征在于,所述第一信息包括小区切换规则,所述小区切换规则包括如下规则中的一种或多种:The method according to claim 1, wherein the first information includes cell switching rules, and the cell switching rules include one or more of the following rules:
    所述第一小区的信号强度大于或等于第一阈值,所述终端设备不进行小区切换;或者,The signal strength of the first cell is greater than or equal to the first threshold, and the terminal device does not perform cell switching; or,
    所述第一小区的信号强度小于或等于第二阈值,所述终端设备进行小区切换;或者,The signal strength of the first cell is less than or equal to the second threshold, and the terminal device performs cell switching; or,
    所述第一小区与所述终端设备具有关联关系,所述终端设备不进行小区切换。The first cell has an associated relationship with the terminal device, and the terminal device does not perform cell switching.
  3. 根据权利要求2所述的方法,其特征在于,所述宿主无线接入节点根据所述第一信息控制所述终端设备的小区切换,包括:The method according to claim 2, wherein the host wireless access node controls the cell switching of the terminal device according to the first information, including:
    所述宿主无线接入节点接收来自所述终端设备的测量信息,所述测量信息包括所述第一小区的信号强度;The host wireless access node receives measurement information from the terminal device, where the measurement information includes the signal strength of the first cell;
    所述宿主无线接入节点根据所述小区切换规则和所述第一小区的信号强度控制所述终端设备的小区切换。The host wireless access node controls cell switching of the terminal device according to the cell switching rule and the signal strength of the first cell.
  4. 根据权利要求2所述的方法,其特征在于,所述宿主无线接入节点根据所述第一信息控制所述终端设备的小区切换,包括:The method according to claim 2, wherein the host wireless access node controls the cell switching of the terminal device according to the first information, including:
    所述宿主无线接入节点确定所述终端设备与所述第一小区具有关联关系;The host wireless access node determines that the terminal device has an association relationship with the first cell;
    所述宿主无线接入节点根据所述小区切换规则和所述关联关系,确定所述终端设备不进行小区切换。The host wireless access node determines that the terminal device does not perform cell switching based on the cell switching rule and the association relationship.
  5. 根据权利要求1至4中任一项所述的方法,其特征在于,所述方法还包括:The method according to any one of claims 1 to 4, characterized in that the method further includes:
    所述宿主无线接入节点向所述终端设备发送所述第一信息。The host wireless access node sends the first information to the terminal device.
  6. 根据权利要求5所述的方法,其特征在于,所述第一信息包括小区重选规则,所述小区重选规则包括如下规则中的一种或多种:The method according to claim 5, characterized in that the first information includes cell reselection rules, and the cell reselection rules include one or more of the following rules:
    所述第一小区的信号强度大于或等于第三阈值,所述终端设备不进行小区重选;或者,The signal strength of the first cell is greater than or equal to the third threshold, and the terminal device does not perform cell reselection; or,
    所述第一小区的信号强度小于或等于第四阈值,所述终端设备进行小区重选;或者,The signal strength of the first cell is less than or equal to the fourth threshold, and the terminal device performs cell reselection; or,
    所述第一小区与所述终端设备具有关联关系,所述终端设备不进行小区重选。The first cell has an associated relationship with the terminal device, and the terminal device does not perform cell reselection.
  7. 根据权利要求5或6所述的方法,其特征在于,所述方法还包括:The method according to claim 5 or 6, characterized in that, the method further includes:
    所述宿主无线接入节点发送第一指示信息,其中,所述第一指示信息指示所述第一小区的小区类型为中继小区。The host wireless access node sends first indication information, wherein the first indication information indicates that the cell type of the first cell is a relay cell.
  8. 根据权利要求1至7中任一项所述的方法,其特征在于,所述方法还包括:The method according to any one of claims 1 to 7, characterized in that the method further includes:
    所述宿主无线接入节点确定所述第一小区的第一标识,其中,所述第一标识用于所述终端设备接入所述第一小区;The host wireless access node determines a first identity of the first cell, wherein the first identity is used for the terminal device to access the first cell;
    所述宿主无线接入节点向所述终端设备发送所述第一标识。The host wireless access node sends the first identification to the terminal device.
  9. 根据权利要求8所述的方法,其特征在于,所述宿主无线接入节点确定所述第一小区的第一标识,包括:The method of claim 8, wherein the host wireless access node determines the first identity of the first cell, including:
    所述宿主无线接入节点接收来自接入与移动性管理功能网元的所述第一标识。 The host wireless access node receives the first identification from the access and mobility management function network element.
  10. 根据权利要求1至9中任一项所述的方法,其特征在于,所述宿主无线接入节点确定第一信息,包括:The method according to any one of claims 1 to 9, characterized in that the host wireless access node determines the first information, including:
    所述宿主无线接入节点接收来自接入与移动性管理功能网元或所述终端设备的第二指示信息,其中,所述第二指示信息指示所述终端设备与所述第一小区具有关联关系;The host wireless access node receives second indication information from the access and mobility management function network element or the terminal device, wherein the second indication information indicates that the terminal device is associated with the first cell. relation;
    所述宿主无线接入节点根据所述第二指示信息确定所述第一信息。The host wireless access node determines the first information according to the second indication information.
  11. 一种通信方法,其特征在于,所述方法包括:A communication method, characterized in that the method includes:
    终端设备接收来自宿主无线接入节点的第一信息,所述第一信息是与所述终端设备接入小区相关的信息,其中,所述终端设备当前接入的小区是中继无线接入节点对应的第一小区,所述中继无线接入节点是所述宿主无线接入节点的子节点;The terminal device receives first information from a host wireless access node, where the first information is information related to a cell accessed by the terminal device, wherein the cell currently accessed by the terminal device is a relay wireless access node Corresponding to the first cell, the relay wireless access node is a child node of the host wireless access node;
    所述终端设备根据所述第一信息控制所述终端设备的小区重选。The terminal device controls cell reselection of the terminal device according to the first information.
  12. 根据权利要求11所述的方法,其特征在于,所述第一信息包括小区重选规则,所述小区重选规则包括如下规则中的一种或多种:The method according to claim 11, characterized in that the first information includes cell reselection rules, and the cell reselection rules include one or more of the following rules:
    所述第一小区的信号强度大于或等于第三阈值,所述终端设备不进行小区重选;或者,The signal strength of the first cell is greater than or equal to the third threshold, and the terminal device does not perform cell reselection; or,
    所述第一小区的信号强度小于或等于第四阈值,所述终端设备进行小区重选;或者,The signal strength of the first cell is less than or equal to the fourth threshold, and the terminal device performs cell reselection; or,
    所述第一小区与所述终端设备具有关联关系,所述终端设备不进行小区重选。The first cell has an associated relationship with the terminal device, and the terminal device does not perform cell reselection.
  13. 根据权利要求12所述的方法,其特征在于,所述终端设备根据所述第一信息控制所述终端设备的小区重选,包括:The method of claim 12, wherein the terminal device controls cell reselection of the terminal device according to the first information, including:
    所述终端设备确定测量信息,所述测量信息包括所述第一小区的信号强度;The terminal device determines measurement information, where the measurement information includes the signal strength of the first cell;
    所述终端设备根据所述小区重选规则和所述第一小区的信号强度控制所述终端设备的小区重选。The terminal device controls cell reselection of the terminal device according to the cell reselection rule and the signal strength of the first cell.
  14. 根据权利要求12所述的方法,其特征在于,所述终端设备根据所述第一信息控制所述终端设备的小区重选,包括:The method of claim 12, wherein the terminal device controls cell reselection of the terminal device according to the first information, including:
    所述终端设备确定所述终端设备与所述第一小区具有关联关系;The terminal device determines that the terminal device has an association relationship with the first cell;
    所述终端设备根据所述小区重选规则和所述关联关系,确定不进行小区重选。The terminal device determines not to perform cell reselection based on the cell reselection rule and the association relationship.
  15. 根据权利要求11至14中任一项所述的方法,其特征在于,所述方法还包括:The method according to any one of claims 11 to 14, characterized in that the method further includes:
    所述终端设备接收来自所述宿主无线接入节点的第一指示信息,其中,所述第一指示信息指示所述第一小区的小区类型为中继小区。The terminal device receives first indication information from the host wireless access node, wherein the first indication information indicates that the cell type of the first cell is a relay cell.
  16. 根据权利要求11至14中任一项所述的方法,其特征在于,所述方法还包括:The method according to any one of claims 11 to 14, characterized in that the method further includes:
    所述终端设备接收来自所述宿主无线接入节点的所述第一小区的第一标识;The terminal device receives a first identifier of the first cell from the host wireless access node;
    所述终端设备根据所述第一标识接入所述第一小区。The terminal device accesses the first cell according to the first identification.
  17. 根据权利要求16所述的方法,其特征在于,所述方法还包括:The method of claim 16, further comprising:
    所述终端设备向所述宿主无线接入节点发送第二指示信息,所述第二指示信息指示所述终端设备与所述第一小区具有关联关系。The terminal device sends second indication information to the host wireless access node, and the second indication information indicates that the terminal device has an association relationship with the first cell.
  18. 根据权利要求16或17所述的方法,其特征在于,所述方法还包括:The method according to claim 16 or 17, characterized in that, the method further includes:
    所述终端设备根据所述第一标识和状态信息,确定所述终端设备与所述第一小区具有关联关系,其中,所述状态信息包括所述终端设备的位置信息和/或所述终端设备与所述中继无线接入节点之间的位置关系。The terminal device determines that the terminal device has an association relationship with the first cell based on the first identification and status information, wherein the status information includes location information of the terminal device and/or the terminal device The location relationship with the relay wireless access node.
  19. 一种通信方法,其特征在于,所述方法包括:A communication method, characterized in that the method includes:
    接入与移动性管理功能网元确定第二信息,所述第二信息用于终端设备接入小区;其中,所述第二信息包括第一小区的第一标识或指示所述终端设备与第一小区具有关联关系, 所述第一小区是所述终端设备当前接入的小区,所述第一小区对应于中继无线接入节点,所述中继无线接入节点是宿主无线接入节点的子节点;The access and mobility management function network element determines second information, the second information is used for the terminal device to access the cell; wherein the second information includes a first identifier of the first cell or indicates that the terminal device is connected to the third cell. A neighborhood has an associated relationship, The first cell is a cell currently accessed by the terminal device, the first cell corresponds to a relay wireless access node, and the relay wireless access node is a child node of a host wireless access node;
    所述接入与移动性管理网元向所述宿主无线接入节点发送所述第二信息。The access and mobility management network element sends the second information to the host wireless access node.
  20. 根据权利要求19所述的方法,其特征在于,所述接入与移动性管理功能网元确定第二信息,包括:The method according to claim 19, characterized in that the access and mobility management function network element determines the second information, including:
    所述接入与移动性管理功能网元接收来自统一数据管理功能网元或者应用功能网元的所述第一标识。The access and mobility management function network element receives the first identification from the unified data management function network element or the application function network element.
  21. 根据权利要求19或20所述的方法,其特征在于,所述接入与移动性管理功能网元确定第二信息,包括:The method according to claim 19 or 20, characterized in that the access and mobility management function network element determines the second information, including:
    所述接入与移动性管理功能网元接收来自所述终端设备的接入信息,所述接入信息包括所述第一小区的标识信息;The access and mobility management function network element receives access information from the terminal device, where the access information includes identification information of the first cell;
    所述接入与移动性管理功能网元接收来自统一数据管理功能网元的第三信息,第三信息包括与UE具有关联关系的一个或多个小区的标识信息,所述一个或多个小区包括第一小区;The access and mobility management function network element receives third information from the unified data management function network element. The third information includes identification information of one or more cells that are associated with the UE. The one or more cells Including the first community;
    所述接入与移动性管理功能网元根据所述接入信息和所述第三信息,确定所述UE与所述第一小区具有关联关系。The access and mobility management function network element determines that the UE has an association relationship with the first cell based on the access information and the third information.
  22. 一种通信装置,其特征在于,所述装置包括处理单元和收发单元;A communication device, characterized in that the device includes a processing unit and a transceiver unit;
    其中,处理单元,用于确定第一信息,所述第一信息是与终端设备接入小区相关的信息,其中,所述终端设备当前接入的小区是中继无线接入节点对应的第一小区,所述中继无线接入节点是所述宿主无线接入节点的子节点;以及根据所述第一信息控制所述终端设备的小区切换。Wherein, the processing unit is configured to determine first information, where the first information is information related to the terminal device accessing a cell, wherein the cell currently accessed by the terminal device is the first cell corresponding to the relay wireless access node. In a cell, the relay wireless access node is a child node of the host wireless access node; and controlling cell switching of the terminal device according to the first information.
  23. 根据权利要求22所述的装置,其特征在于,所述第一信息包括小区切换规则,所述小区切换规则包括如下规则中的一种或多种:The device according to claim 22, wherein the first information includes cell switching rules, and the cell switching rules include one or more of the following rules:
    所述第一小区的信号强度大于或等于第一阈值,所述终端设备不进行小区切换;或者,The signal strength of the first cell is greater than or equal to the first threshold, and the terminal device does not perform cell switching; or,
    所述第一小区的信号强度小于或等于第二阈值,所述终端设备进行小区切换;或者,The signal strength of the first cell is less than or equal to the second threshold, and the terminal device performs cell switching; or,
    所述第一小区与所述终端设备具有关联关系,所述终端设备不进行小区切换。The first cell has an associated relationship with the terminal device, and the terminal device does not perform cell switching.
  24. 根据权利要求23所述的装置,其特征在于,在根据所述第一信息控制所述终端设备的小区切换时,所述收发单元,用于接收来自所述终端设备的测量信息,所述测量信息包括所述第一小区的信号强度;The apparatus according to claim 23, wherein when controlling cell switching of the terminal equipment according to the first information, the transceiver unit is configured to receive measurement information from the terminal equipment, and the measurement The information includes the signal strength of the first cell;
    所述处理单元,用于根据所述小区切换规则和所述第一小区的信号强度控制所述终端设备的小区切换。The processing unit is configured to control cell switching of the terminal device according to the cell switching rule and the signal strength of the first cell.
  25. 根据权利要求23所述的装置,其特征在于,在根据所述第一信息控制所述终端设备的小区切换时,所述处理单元具体用于:The apparatus according to claim 23, wherein when controlling cell switching of the terminal equipment according to the first information, the processing unit is specifically configured to:
    确定所述终端设备与所述第一小区具有关联关系;Determine that the terminal device has an association relationship with the first cell;
    根据所述小区切换规则和所述关联关系,确定所述终端设备不进行小区切换。According to the cell switching rule and the association relationship, it is determined that the terminal equipment does not perform cell switching.
  26. 根据权利要求22至25中任一项所述的装置,其特征在于,所述收发单元,进一步用于:The device according to any one of claims 22 to 25, characterized in that the transceiver unit is further used to:
    向所述终端设备发送所述第一信息。Send the first information to the terminal device.
  27. 根据权利要求26所述的装置,其特征在于,所述第一信息包括小区重选规则,所述小区重选规则包括如下规则中的一种或多种: The device according to claim 26, wherein the first information includes cell reselection rules, and the cell reselection rules include one or more of the following rules:
    所述第一小区的信号强度大于或等于第三阈值,所述终端设备不进行小区重选;或者,The signal strength of the first cell is greater than or equal to the third threshold, and the terminal device does not perform cell reselection; or,
    所述第一小区的信号强度小于或等于第四阈值,所述终端设备进行小区重选;或者,The signal strength of the first cell is less than or equal to the fourth threshold, and the terminal device performs cell reselection; or,
    所述第一小区与所述终端设备具有关联关系,所述终端设备不进行小区重选。The first cell has an associated relationship with the terminal device, and the terminal device does not perform cell reselection.
  28. 根据权利要求26或27所述的装置,其特征在于,所述收发单元,进一步用于:The device according to claim 26 or 27, characterized in that the transceiver unit is further used to:
    发送第一指示信息,其中,所述第一指示信息指示所述第一小区的小区类型为中继小区。Send first indication information, wherein the first indication information indicates that the cell type of the first cell is a relay cell.
  29. 根据权利要求22至28中任一项所述的装置,其特征在于,The device according to any one of claims 22 to 28, characterized in that:
    所述处理单元,进一步用于确定所述第一小区的第一标识,其中,所述第一标识用于所述终端设备接入所述第一小区;The processing unit is further configured to determine a first identifier of the first cell, wherein the first identifier is used for the terminal device to access the first cell;
    所述收发单元,进一步用于向所述终端设备发送所述第一标识。The transceiver unit is further configured to send the first identification to the terminal device.
  30. 根据权利要求29所述的装置,其特征在于,在确定所述第一小区的第一标识时,所述收发单元,具体用于:The device according to claim 29, wherein when determining the first identity of the first cell, the transceiver unit is specifically configured to:
    接收来自接入与移动性管理功能网元的所述第一标识。Receive the first identification from the access and mobility management function network element.
  31. 根据权利要求22至30中任一项所述的装置,其特征在于,在确定第一信息时,所述收发单元用于:The device according to any one of claims 22 to 30, characterized in that when determining the first information, the transceiver unit is used to:
    接收来自接入与移动性管理功能网元或所述终端设备的第二指示信息,其中,所述第二指示信息指示所述终端设备与所述第一小区具有关联关系;Receive second indication information from the access and mobility management function network element or the terminal device, wherein the second indication information indicates that the terminal device has an association relationship with the first cell;
    所述处理单元,用于根据所述第二指示信息确定所述第一信息。The processing unit is configured to determine the first information according to the second indication information.
  32. 一种通信装置,其特征在于,所述装置包括处理单元和收发单元;A communication device, characterized in that the device includes a processing unit and a transceiver unit;
    其中,收发单元,用于接收来自宿主无线接入节点的第一信息,所述第一信息是与所述终端设备接入小区相关的信息,其中,所述终端设备当前接入的小区是中继无线接入节点对应的第一小区,所述中继无线接入节点是所述宿主无线接入节点的子节点;Wherein, the transceiver unit is configured to receive first information from the host wireless access node, where the first information is information related to the cell accessed by the terminal equipment, wherein the cell currently accessed by the terminal equipment is in Following the first cell corresponding to the wireless access node, the relay wireless access node is a child node of the host wireless access node;
    所述处理单元,用于根据所述第一信息控制所述终端设备的小区重选。The processing unit is configured to control cell reselection of the terminal device according to the first information.
  33. 根据权利要求32所述的装置,其特征在于,所述第一信息包括小区重选规则,所述小区重选规则包括如下规则中的一种或多种:The device according to claim 32, wherein the first information includes cell reselection rules, and the cell reselection rules include one or more of the following rules:
    所述第一小区的信号强度大于或等于第三阈值,所述终端设备不进行小区重选;或者,The signal strength of the first cell is greater than or equal to the third threshold, and the terminal device does not perform cell reselection; or,
    所述第一小区的信号强度小于或等于第四阈值,所述终端设备进行小区重选;或者,The signal strength of the first cell is less than or equal to the fourth threshold, and the terminal device performs cell reselection; or,
    所述第一小区与所述终端设备具有关联关系,所述终端设备不进行小区重选。The first cell has an associated relationship with the terminal device, and the terminal device does not perform cell reselection.
  34. 根据权利要求33所述的装置,其特征在于,在根据所述第一信息控制所述终端设备的小区重选时,所述处理单元具体用于:The apparatus according to claim 33, wherein when controlling cell reselection of the terminal equipment according to the first information, the processing unit is specifically configured to:
    确定测量信息,所述测量信息包括所述第一小区的信号强度;Determine measurement information, the measurement information including the signal strength of the first cell;
    根据所述小区重选规则和所述第一小区的信号强度控制所述终端设备的小区重选。Cell reselection of the terminal device is controlled according to the cell reselection rule and the signal strength of the first cell.
  35. 根据权利要求33所述的装置,其特征在于,在根据所述第一信息控制所述终端设备的小区重选时,所述处理单元具体用于:The apparatus according to claim 33, wherein when controlling cell reselection of the terminal equipment according to the first information, the processing unit is specifically configured to:
    确定所述终端设备与所述第一小区具有关联关系;Determine that the terminal device has an association relationship with the first cell;
    根据所述小区重选规则和所述关联关系,确定不进行小区重选。According to the cell reselection rule and the association relationship, it is determined not to perform cell reselection.
  36. 根据权利要求32至35中任一项所述的装置,其特征在于,所述收发单元,进一步用于:The device according to any one of claims 32 to 35, characterized in that the transceiver unit is further used for:
    接收来自所述宿主无线接入节点的第一指示信息,其中,所述第一指示信息指示所述第一小区的小区类型为中继小区。 Receive first indication information from the host wireless access node, wherein the first indication information indicates that the cell type of the first cell is a relay cell.
  37. 根据权利要求32至35中任一项所述的装置,其特征在于,The device according to any one of claims 32 to 35, characterized in that,
    所述收发单元,进一步用于接收来自所述宿主无线接入节点的所述第一小区的第一标识;The transceiver unit is further configured to receive the first identifier of the first cell from the host wireless access node;
    所述处理单元,进一步用于根据所述第一标识接入所述第一小区。The processing unit is further configured to access the first cell according to the first identification.
  38. 根据权利要求37所述的装置,其特征在于,所述收发单元,进一步用于:The device according to claim 37, characterized in that the transceiver unit is further used to:
    向所述宿主无线接入节点发送第二指示信息,所述第二指示信息指示所述终端设备与所述第一小区具有关联关系。Send second indication information to the host wireless access node, where the second indication information indicates that the terminal device has an association relationship with the first cell.
  39. 根据权利要求37或38所述的装置,其特征在于,所述处理单元,进一步用于:The device according to claim 37 or 38, characterized in that the processing unit is further used for:
    根据所述第一标识和状态信息,确定所述终端设备与所述第一小区具有关联关系,其中,所述状态信息包括所述终端设备的位置信息和/或所述终端设备与所述中继无线接入节点之间的位置关系。According to the first identification and status information, it is determined that the terminal equipment has an association relationship with the first cell, wherein the status information includes location information of the terminal equipment and/or the terminal equipment and the Following the location relationship between wireless access nodes.
  40. 一种通信装置,其特征在于,所述装置包括处理单元和收发单元;A communication device, characterized in that the device includes a processing unit and a transceiver unit;
    其中,所述处理单元,用于确定第二信息,所述第二信息用于终端设备接入小区;其中,所述第二信息包括第一小区的第一标识或指示所述终端设备与第一小区具有关联关系,所述第一小区是所述终端设备当前接入的小区,所述第一小区对应于中继无线接入节点,所述中继无线接入节点是宿主无线接入节点的子节点;Wherein, the processing unit is used to determine second information, and the second information is used for the terminal device to access the cell; wherein the second information includes a first identification of the first cell or indicates that the terminal device is connected to the first cell. A cell has an association relationship, the first cell is a cell currently accessed by the terminal device, the first cell corresponds to a relay wireless access node, and the relay wireless access node is a host wireless access node. child node;
    所述收发单元,用于向所述宿主无线接入节点发送所述第二信息。The transceiver unit is configured to send the second information to the host wireless access node.
  41. 根据权利要求40所述的装置,其特征在于,在确定第二信息时,所述收发单元具体用于:The device according to claim 40, characterized in that when determining the second information, the transceiver unit is specifically configured to:
    接收来自统一数据管理功能网元或者应用功能网元的所述第一标识。Receive the first identification from a unified data management function network element or an application function network element.
  42. 根据权利要求40或41所述的装置,其特征在于,在确定第二信息时,所述收发单元具体用于:The device according to claim 40 or 41, characterized in that when determining the second information, the transceiver unit is specifically used to:
    接收来自所述终端设备的接入信息,所述接入信息包括所述第一小区的标识信息;Receive access information from the terminal device, where the access information includes identification information of the first cell;
    接收来自统一数据管理功能网元的第三信息,第三信息包括与UE具有关联关系的一个或多个小区的标识信息,所述一个或多个小区包括第一小区;Receive third information from the unified data management function network element, where the third information includes identification information of one or more cells that are associated with the UE, and the one or more cells include the first cell;
    所述处理单元,具体用于根据所述接入信息和所述第三信息,确定所述UE与所述第一小区具有关联关系。The processing unit is specifically configured to determine, according to the access information and the third information, that the UE has an association relationship with the first cell.
  43. 一种通信系统,其特征在于,所述通信系统包括如权利要求22至31中任一项所述的通信装置,如权利要求32至39中任一项所述的通信装置,或如权利要求40至42中任一项所述的通信装置中的一项或多项。A communication system, characterized in that the communication system includes a communication device according to any one of claims 22 to 31, a communication device according to any one of claims 32 to 39, or a communication device according to any one of claims 32 to 39. One or more of the communication devices described in any one of 40 to 42.
  44. 一种通信装置,其特征在于,包括处理器和存储器,所述存储器和所述处理器耦合,所述处理器用于执行如权利要求1至10中任一项所述的方法,或用于执行如权利要求11至18中任一项所述的方法。A communication device, characterized in that it includes a processor and a memory, the memory is coupled to the processor, and the processor is used to perform the method according to any one of claims 1 to 10, or to perform A method as claimed in any one of claims 11 to 18.
  45. 一种计算机可读存储介质,其特征在于,所述计算机可读存储介质用于存储计算机程序,当所述计算机程序在计算机上运行时,使得所述计算机执行如权利要求1至10中任一项所述的方法,或使得所述计算机执行如权利要求11至18中任一项所述的方法。A computer-readable storage medium, characterized in that the computer-readable storage medium is used to store a computer program. When the computer program is run on a computer, it causes the computer to execute any one of claims 1 to 10. The method described in claim 11, or causing the computer to perform the method described in any one of claims 11 to 18.
  46. 一种芯片系统,其特征在于,所述芯片系统包括:A chip system, characterized in that the chip system includes:
    处理器和接口,所述处理器用于从所述接口调用并运行指令,当所述处理器执行所述指令时,实现如权利要求1至10中任一项所述的方法,或实现如权利要求11至18中任一项所述的方法。 A processor and an interface, the processor is configured to call and run instructions from the interface, and when the processor executes the instructions, the method as claimed in any one of claims 1 to 10 is implemented, or the method as claimed in claim 1 is implemented. The method of any one of claims 11 to 18.
  47. 一种计算机程序产品,其特征在于,所述计算机程序产品包括计算机程序,当所述计算机程序在计算机上运行时,使得所述计算机执行如权利要求1至10中任一项所述的方法,或使得所述计算机执行如权利要求11至18中任一项所述的方法。 A computer program product, characterized in that the computer program product includes a computer program, which when the computer program is run on a computer, causes the computer to perform the method according to any one of claims 1 to 10, Or causing the computer to perform the method according to any one of claims 11 to 18.
PCT/CN2023/078461 2022-04-20 2023-02-27 Communication method and apparatus WO2023202220A1 (en)

Applications Claiming Priority (2)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
CN202210417145.6A CN116963204A (en) 2022-04-20 2022-04-20 Communication method and device
CN202210417145.6 2022-04-20

Publications (1)

Publication Number Publication Date
WO2023202220A1 true WO2023202220A1 (en) 2023-10-26

Family

ID=88419130

Family Applications (1)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
PCT/CN2023/078461 WO2023202220A1 (en) 2022-04-20 2023-02-27 Communication method and apparatus

Country Status (2)

Country Link
CN (1) CN116963204A (en)
WO (1) WO2023202220A1 (en)

Citations (6)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
US20140254476A1 (en) * 2013-03-08 2014-09-11 Research In Motion Limited Sending data rate information to a wireless access network node
CN110536375A (en) * 2018-08-09 2019-12-03 中兴通讯股份有限公司 Method for network access, device, the network equipment and computer readable storage medium
WO2021159238A1 (en) * 2020-02-10 2021-08-19 华为技术有限公司 Data processing method, communication apparatus and communication system
CN114079986A (en) * 2020-08-18 2022-02-22 华为技术有限公司 Mobility management method and device
WO2022067818A1 (en) * 2020-09-30 2022-04-07 华为技术有限公司 Data transmission method and apparatus
CN115278817A (en) * 2021-04-30 2022-11-01 华为技术有限公司 Communication method, device and system

Patent Citations (6)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
US20140254476A1 (en) * 2013-03-08 2014-09-11 Research In Motion Limited Sending data rate information to a wireless access network node
CN110536375A (en) * 2018-08-09 2019-12-03 中兴通讯股份有限公司 Method for network access, device, the network equipment and computer readable storage medium
WO2021159238A1 (en) * 2020-02-10 2021-08-19 华为技术有限公司 Data processing method, communication apparatus and communication system
CN114079986A (en) * 2020-08-18 2022-02-22 华为技术有限公司 Mobility management method and device
WO2022067818A1 (en) * 2020-09-30 2022-04-07 华为技术有限公司 Data transmission method and apparatus
CN115278817A (en) * 2021-04-30 2022-11-01 华为技术有限公司 Communication method, device and system

Also Published As

Publication number Publication date
CN116963204A (en) 2023-10-27

Similar Documents

Publication Publication Date Title
US11477677B2 (en) Electronic device and method for wireless communications
WO2019128947A1 (en) Communication method and communication device
JP2021184651A (en) Radio communication system, radio station, radio terminal, and communication control method therefor
WO2013075602A1 (en) Method, base station and user equipment for achieving carrier aggregation
CN110113766A (en) Master base station and its method
US20230189091A1 (en) Iab node configuration method and communication apparatus
CN109076630B (en) Wireless communication system
EP4192101A1 (en) Node switching method and related device
JP2023534851A (en) Communication method and communication device applied to integrated access and backhaul IAB system
CN115299107A (en) Reestablishing method and communication device
TW201836382A (en) Communication method, auxiliary network node, and terminal
WO2021185350A1 (en) Communication method, access network device, terminal device and core network device
WO2021238882A1 (en) Method and device for implementing service continuity
WO2021204022A1 (en) Measurement method and apparatus
WO2020031358A1 (en) User device and transmission method
JP2023535969A (en) LOGICAL CHANNEL LCH SETTING METHOD, COMMUNICATION DEVICE, AND COMMUNICATION SYSTEM
CN115707036A (en) Method and device for transmitting data
JP2020061732A (en) Uplink bearer binding in handover
WO2023202220A1 (en) Communication method and apparatus
WO2022017303A1 (en) Electronic device for wireless communication system, and method and storage medium
WO2021000818A1 (en) Communication method, apparatus, and system
CN114390622A (en) Information transmission method and device and communication equipment
WO2023179262A1 (en) Cell information configuration method and apparatus, and readable storage medium and chip system
WO2023179231A1 (en) Cell information configuration method and apparatus, and readable storage medium and chip system
WO2023217105A1 (en) Electronic device and method for wireless communication, and computer-readable storage medium

Legal Events

Date Code Title Description
121 Ep: the epo has been informed by wipo that ep was designated in this application

Ref document number: 23790883

Country of ref document: EP

Kind code of ref document: A1